You are on page 1of 281

UNI-METAL

Constructions Steel Products


ETAL www.unimetal-ikk.com

This Master catalogue is designed to be helpful to engineers and contractors in the selection and application of
Cable Management Systems .
CONTENT

39 81 111

123 147 165

243 249 267


05 165
Introduction Accessories

15 173
Technical Information C-Channels Systems

39 235
Cable Ladders System Cantilevers & Beams

243
Fasteners, Bolts & Nuts

81 249
Cable Trays System Heavy Duty System

111 267
Cable Trunkings System Firestop System

123
Under Floor Trunking
System

147 275
Basket Trays System Locations
INTRODUCTION
o fi l e
a n i e s Pr
Comp

IKK GROUP OF COMPANIES

The IKK Group is a major business institution, serving most of the Arab World in the Industrial, Construction
and Trading fields as well as in Specialized Maintenance and Services.

After more than four decades in the business, the IKK Group has become one of the leading enterprises in the region
with focus on the Construction Industry in general.

The IKK Group operates through 200 divisions, branches and outlets, spread over 15 countries, covering all major cities
in the region and employing over 12,800 employees.

6
UNITECH For Building & Construction Materials
Unitech for Building and Construction Materials, a member of the IKK Group of Companies was established in 1979 in
Saudi Arabia. A “Solutions Provider“ company, specialized in the: Design /Manufacturing and Trading of Building and
Construction Materials.

Towards its commitment to quality, the company implemented the Quality Management concept, and has acquired
the ISO 9001:2008 Quality Management System, in addition to being a member of the U.S.Green Building Council
(USGBC).

UNI-METAL - Constructions Steel Products


Uni-Metal trades steel construction products including expanded metals, cladding fixations, c-channel systems,
clamps & hangers, block ladders, dry wall and ceiling accessories, cable management systems: cable trays, cable
ladders, cable trunkings, basket trays, cable supports: steel lintels and block work accessories.

Most are designed and manufactured in its Specialized (SIGMA) Factory for Steel Products (SFSP). Uni-Metal offices are
spread among various cities in the MENA region; KSA, UAE, Qatar, Lebanon, Jordan, Libya, Oman, Bahrain, Egypt, and
Kuwait; all are backed up by Unitech‘s design office in Stuttgart / Germany.

SFSP - Specialized Factory for Steel Products


Sigma Factory for Steel Products
Specialized Factory for Steel Products / Sigma Factory for Steel Products was first established in 1989 and has been
expanding ever since through a variety of products and through its geographical presence. Production at the factory
is observed using modern practices of manufacturing methods in the steel construction industry with a definite
compliance to international standards of fabrication. SFSP has manufacturing facilities in KSA, UAE, Egypt & Lebanon.

SFSP adapts quickly and easily to the market demands and requirements. Quality at SFSP is uncompromised; the
factories have been able to acquire ISO 9001: 2008 in Jeddah in Saudi Arabia, Sigma Factory for Steel Products in DIC
in UAE, in addition to ISO 14001: 2004 in the 6th of October City in Egypt.

www
.ikkg
roup
.com
| ww
w.un
itech
-ikk.
com
| ww
w.un
imet
al-ik
k.co
m|w
ww.s
fsp-
ikk.c
om
7
Cable Ladders System
Cable Ladders of different side heights are available upon request.

Cable Trays System


Cable Trays are designed to meet most requirements of cable and electrical wire installations and comply to local
and international standards of fabrications and finishes.

Cable Trunkings System


Cable Trunkings and Accessories are offered in a comprehensive range. Mill galvanized, hot-dip galvanized, and
powder coated are the various finishes produced in our factories.

Under Floor Trunking


Uni-Metal, Under floor Trunking Systems` solutions incorporate a range of products for the distribution of power
and data services. A variety of wiring options are available that provides seamless connection all the way from the
incoming feed to the desktop.

Basket Trays System


SFSP’s Basket Tray systems make connections fast and simple with limited need for tools. Its design allows for
continuous airflow, and prevents heating up of cables. SFSP’s Basket Tray comes in a full range of sizes and is made
with high strength welded steel wires.

Uni-Channels System
Cable Support Systems are well designed to provide necessary support for cable trays, cable ladders and trunkings.
Cable supports are manufactured according to common standards from high quality raw materials.
SFSP - KSA
SFSP / Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
Specialized Factory for Steel Products - 3rd Industrial City / Jeddah
Tel: +966 12 637 4482 | Fax: +966 12 636 1963 | sfsp.jeddah@ikkgroup.com

SFSP / UAE
SIGMA Factory for Steel Products - DIC (Dubai Industrial City)

S
Tel : +971 4 429 7024 | Fax: +971 4 429 7028 | sfsp.dic@ikkgroup.com

I E
OR
SFSP / EGYPT

C T Specialized Factory for Steel Products - 6th of October City, Cairo

FA
Tel : +20 2 3831 2477 | Fax: +20 2 3831 1036 | sfsp.cairo@ikkgroup.com

SFSP / LEBANON
Specialized Factory for Steel Products / s.a.r.l - Tanayel, Bekaa
Tel: +961 8 514 290 | Fax: +961 8 514 291 | sfsp.lebanon@ikkgroup.com
CER ISO
TIFI
CA TES

CERT
IFICAT
E OF
REGIS
TRAT
This is
to certi

Sigma
fy tha
t
ION
ctor Fa
haib 3, y for
Saih Su
Steel
Dubai 4
Industri R/A Produc
Dubai al Cit ts
y
Unite
d Arab
Emira
tes
has be
en au
ISO 90 dit
01:200 ed and fou
8 Quali nd
ty Ma to meet the
Scope nageme req
of certi nt Syste uiremen
m ts of sta
Trading ficati ndard
on
Constru and Manu
ction factur
Mater ing of
ials all kin
ds of
Steel
and

Certific
ate nu
mber
Issue
number
: 59 65
: 20130
1
Certific
ate star
t date:
Certific 4 July
2011
ate exp
iry dat
e: 3 July
Date of 2014
initial Signe
certific
ation:
d on be
4 July half of
2011 This cert
ifica BM TRA
Chief Tom Jo
be retu te remains DA Cert
ification
Centr Op hnsto
al Certi erating Offic n
rned to the
BM TRA property of Ltd, Chil
DA Cert BM TRA tern Hou
The use
of the
ifica DA
verificat tion Ltd or Certification
se, Stoc
king Lane fication er
UKAS
accredit ion of dest
the cert royed if
Ltd. This , High
Wycomb Service
ation
mark
indicates
ificate requ certifica
is avai ested. Furt te and all
e, Buck s
inghams
lable her copies hire,
Multisite accredit through clarifica or HP14
clients ation BM TRA tion rega reproduction 4ND,
in resp DA at rdin UK
– The
scope ect of the abov g the scop s of the cert
of cert those e addr e of this ificate
activities ess or shall
ification
shown covered at wwwcertificate
above by the .bmtrad and
includes accredit a.com
the part ation
certifica
icipating tion 012
sites show
n in appe
ndix A

Design Office- GERMANY

11
FSP
SFSP Is a leading manufacturer and fabricator of steel and

S
aluminum products used for the support of equipment
in industrial, commercial, utility and OEM installations.
Our customers have access to the most complete support
systems offered in the industry including metal framings,
cable management systems, pipe hangers, slotted angles,
fasteners and others.

(Our factory is equipped with an in-house hot-dip


galvanization facility) .

12
CNC Machines

Roll Forming Machine

Welding Robots

13
TECHNICAL
INFORMATION
MATERIALS AND FINISHES
Materials
Aluminum
G.Aluminum 6063 T6

Mild Steel - Plain


A. Hot Rolled Steel Plates, Sheets and Coils S235 JR
as per:
EN 10025 -2 / DIN 17100 / BS 4360 / ASTM A 653M / ASTM A 1011
/ ASTM A 1011-01a
JIS 3101 / JIS 3106 / GB 700 / GB / T1591.
ASTM A 907 / ASTM A 1018M.
ASTM A 570M / ASTM A 572M.
B. Cold Rolled Steel DC 01,
as per:
EN 10130 / DIN 1623, Part 2 / BS 1449:1 / ASTM A366 / ASTM A 1008 / JIS G 3141 / GB 699.
EN 10131 / ASTM A 568M

Mild Steel - Galvanized


C. Continuously Pre- Galvanized Hot–Dip Zinc Coated Steel DX 51D + Z
as per:
EN 10327 / DIN 17162 / BS 2989/ ASTM A 527M / ASTM A 653M / JIS G 3302.
EN 10326/ EN 10142 / ASTM A 526, 527, 528/ ASTM A 146

D. Electro Galvanized Steel (Electrolytic Coating) DC01 + ZE v


as per:
EN 10152 / DIN 17163 / ASTM A591 / JIS G 3313 / JIS G 3141/BS 1449:1
EN 10131

Stainless Steel
F.Austenitic Stainless Steels SS 304 & SS 316,
as per:
ASTM A 240 /EN 10088-2/ DIN 17400 / BS 1449:2 /
ASTM A480 / ASTM A666 / ISO 3506 / EN 10028-7 /JIS G 4304
F.1 Stainless Steel Fasteners EN 3506
F.2 Stainless Steel Wire BS 1554 ,ASTM A276

Finishes
1- Hot–DIP Galvanization after Fabrication
as per:
ASTM A 123 / ASTM A 153 / ISO 1461.
BS 729 / DIN 50976

2- Zinc Electroplating after Fabrication


as per:
ASTM B633 / EN 12329 / ISO 4042/ BS 1706 / BS 3382 / DIN 50961

3- Powder Coating
Epoxy / Polyester / Epoxy & Polyester
BS 3900 / ISO 2409 / ISO 1519 / ISO 1520

16
PRODUCTS RANGE

The different types of tray designs are described below:

Ladder (Cable Ladder)


Swaged rounded tubular (Aluminum or Steel) or welded
c-channel (steel). A prefabricated metal structure
consisting of two side rails connected by individual
transverse embers or rungs. Ladder Cable Trays are the
most common and the most economical types of trays.
They also provide maximum ventilation for cabling.
Swaged Rounded Tubular Welded C-Channel

Trough
A prefabricated metal structure with clear openings no
greater than 4”(100mm). Trough Cable Trays are the best
choice for smaller cables. Ventilated troughs offer some
air-flow while completely eliminating cable sagging.

Ventilated Bottom Solid Bottom

Perforated Cable Tray (Cable Trays)


A prefabricated metal structure consisting of a bottom
with no openings within the cable bearing surface.
Solid bottom Cable Trays completely eliminate cable
sagging and offer maximum protection for the cables.

Wire Mesh (Basket Tray)


Is ideally suitable for light - to medium-duty commercial
and industrial applications where space is at a premium.
SFSP wire Basket Trays have a fast connection profile for
installations requiring long runs of straight Cable Trays
lengths. Applications : Network cabling, wiring closets,
fiber-to-desktop applications and can often be used in
suspended ceiling plenum areas and under computer
room flooring.

Channel (Cable Trunking)


A prefabricated metal structure consisting of a one-piece
ventilated or solid bottom channel section not exceeding
6”(150mm) in width according to the European Standard
“ IEC 61084-2-2 2003-05”.
Specialized Factory for Steel Products (Jeddah/KSA)
Sigma Factory for Steel Products (DIC /UAE)
Specialized Factory for Steel Products (6th of October/Egypt)

UNI-METAL Cable Tray Systems, fittings and accessories from SFSP are manufactured in compliance with :

- IEC 61537 International Electrotechnical Commission


(Cable management – Cable tray systems and cable ladder systems)

- SASO IEC (61537/2007) Saudi Standard


(Cable management – Cable tray systems and cable ladder systems)

- NEMA VE 1 - 2009 National Electrical Manufacturers Association.


(Metal Cable Tray Systems)

- NEMA VE 2 - 2006 National Electrical Manufacturers Association.


(Metal Cable Tray Installation Guide Lines)

- NEC (ANSI / NFPA 70) National Electric Code


(Metal Cable Tray Guide Lines)
UNI-METAL Cable Ladder Tray Systems are designed to meet most requirements of cable and electrical
wire installations and comply to local and international standards of fabrication and finishing.
Cable Tray Systems are economical wire and cable management systems designed to support and
protect electrical wires and cables.

National Electric Code (NEC) permits Cable Trays in a wide variety of indoor and outdoor applications.
The NEC also permits Cable Trays for use as equipment ground conductor.

Cable Tray Systems can provide significant advantages in cable filling over other wiring methods.
This can provide savings in the size or number of raceways required, thereby, reducing both material
and labor costs.
In many cases, NEC permits greater conductor ampacities in Cable Tray Systems than for other wiring
methods.

Under certain conditions, the NEC allows “Free Air” rating of large, single conductor power cables (4/0
& larger) in ventilated Cable Trays Systems. This can provide significant savings in conductor costs.
Cable Trays permit much greater spacing between support hangers than most other systems, providing
savings in support costs and installation labor.
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
ACCORDING TO IEC 61537 STANDARD

Product under IEC 61537 - 2008 standard are in compliance with the requirement of the European directive.
This standard specifies the requirements for:

- Installation
- Load testing
- Classification
- Marking, dimensions
- Electrical Continuity 

MATERIAL: METALLIC:
Flame spreading resistance: Non Flame Spreading
Electrical Conductivity Characteristics With Conductivity
Electrical Continuity Characteristics With Continuity

SFSP products meet electrical continuity requirement: Resistance ≤ 5 milli Ohm/mm


without couplers
Resistance ≤ 50 milli Ohm with splice plate
Splice Plate

The system components are designed to withstand. The stress likely to occur during recommended transport and
storage. Cable tray system and cable ladder systems according to IEC are not intended to be used for human support.

Table 1

Classification for resistance against corrosion


Class Reference - Material and Finish
0 a
None
1 Electroplated to a minimum thickness of 5 µm
2 Electroplated to a minimum thickness of 12 µm
3 Pre-galvanised to grade 275 to EN 10327 and EN 10326
4 Pre-galvanised to grade 350 to EN 10327 and EN 10326
5 Post-galvanised tp a zinc mean coating thickness (minimum) of 45 µm according to ISO 1461 for zinc thickness only
6 Post-galvanised tp a zinc mean coating thickness (minimum) of 55 µm according to ISO 1461 for zinc thickness only
7 Post-galvanised tp a zinc mean coating thickness (minimum) of 70 µm according to ISO 1461 for zinc thickness only
8 Post-galvanised tp a zinc mean coating thickness (minimum) of 85 µm according to ISO 1461 for zinc thickness only (usually high
silicon steel)
9A Stainless steel manufactured to ASTM: A 240/A 240M - 95a designation S30400 or EN 10088 grade 1 - 4301 without a
post-treatmentb
9B Stainless steel manufactured to ASTM: A 240/A 240M - 95a designation S31603 or EN 10088 grade 1 - 4301 without a
post-treatmentb
9C Stainless steel manufactured to ASTM: A 240/A 240M - 95a designation S30400 or EN 10088 grade 1 - 4301 with a
post-treatmentb
9D Stainless steel manufactured to ASTM: A 240/A 240M - 95a designation S31603 or EN 10088 grade 1 - 4404 with a
post-treatmentb
a
For materials which have no declared corrosion resistance classification
b
the post - treatment process is used to improve the protection against crevice crack corrosion and the contamination by other steels.

20
Minimum temperature for the system Maximum temperature for the system
Table 2 Table 3
component as given in table 2 component as given in table 3
Minimum Temperature Classification Maximum Temperature Classification
Minimum transport, storage, installation and application Maximum transport, storage, installation and application
temperature ºC temperature ºC
+5 +40
-5 +60
-15 +90
-20 +105
-40 +120
-50 +150

Table 4 Table 5

Perforation base area Free base area classification (Cable Ladder


Classification Length)
Classification Perforation in the base area Classification Free base area
A up to 2% X up to 80%
B over 2 % and up to 15 % Y over 80 % and up to 90 %
C over 15 % and up to 30 % Z More than 90 %
D More than 30 %
NOTE Classification D relates to IEC 60364 - 5 - 52, Sub clause NOTE Classification Z relates to IEC 60364 - 5 - 52, Sub clause
A.52.6.2, second paragraph A.52.6.2, third paragraph

Table 6 Table 7

Zinc coating thickness of reference materials Salt spray test duration


Minimum coating Mean coating thickness Class
Minimum Duration
Class thickness as given in (minimum) (as detailed in
Thickness h
EN 10327 or EN 10326 to ISO 1461 Table 1
0 -
µm µm µm
1 24
0a - - -
2 96
1 5 - -
3 155
2 12 - -
4 195
3 - 15 -
5 450
4 - 19 -
6 550
5 - - 45
7 700
6 - - 55
8 850 
7 - - 70
8 - - 85
As declared by the manufacturer or responsible vendor

21
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
ACCORDING TO IEC 61537 STANDARD

Products covered by this standard are, in normal use, passive in respect of electromagnetic influences, emission
and immunity. NOTE When products covered by this standard are installed as part of a wiring installation, the
installation may emit or may be influenced by electromagnetic signals. The degree of influence will depend on
the nature of the installation within its operating environment and the apparatus connected by the wiring.

Power supply cables and signal cables can share the same cable conveyance systems (Trays, Channels, Etc.)

Adequate seperation need to be provided (by distance or shielding) between power cables and signal cables. Power
cables and signal cables need to be cross at right angles.

In order to prevent disturbances, the minimum seperation between power cables and signal cables depends on many
factors, such as following:

a) The level of immunity from the various electromagnetic interferance (surges, overcurrents, lighting impulses, ring
waves, continuous waves, ect.) of the equipment connected to the signal cabling system.
b) The connection of the equipment to the grounding system.
c) The local electromagnetic environment (the simultaneous appearance of disturbances: for example, harmonics added
to discharges and to continuous waves).
d) The electromagnetic spectrum.
e) The distances that the cables run parallel to each other (the coupling zone).
f) The kind of cable.
g) Cable attenuation against coupling.
h) The quality of the connections between the connectors and the cable.
f) The type of cable conveyance system and its accessories.

Seperation between signal cabling and power cabling


Distance
Type of installation Without a dividing
wall or with a non Aluminum divider Steel divider
metal divider (1)
Unshielded power cable and
200 mm 100 mm 50 mm
Unshielded signal cable
Unshielded power cable and
50 mm 20 mm 5 mm
shielded signal cable (2)
shielded power cable and
30 mm 10 mm 2 mm
Unshielded signal cable
shielded power cable and
0 mm 0 mm 0 mm
shielded signal cable

1) It is assumed that in the event of a metal divider, the design of the cable conveyance system will provide shielding attenuation that is approximate
to the material used in the divider.
2) Shielded signal cables have to be comply with the EN 50288 series.

22
Metal systems for cable conveyance: trays, channels, etc.

Metal systems for cable conveyance should always be connected to the local ground at both
ends. Over long distances (more than 50 m), additional connections to the ground systems are
recommended at irregular intervals. All ground should be a short as possible.

Non-metal systems for cable conveyance: trays, channels, etc.

In order to improve the EMC behaviour of non-metal systems for cable conveyance, when devices
connected to the wiring systems with unshielded cables are not affected by low frequency
disturbances, it is advisable to add a cable to the cable conveyance system, such as a parallel ground
conductor connected at both ends to the local ground system. Connections should be made to metal
parts with low impedance (for example, to a large piece of the sheet metal of an electrical cabinet).

The parallel ground conductor should be designed to resist the common mode and fault currents.

Ground and equipotentiel connections

Overview, the basic purposes of connection and grounding applicable to unshielded and shielded
wiring systems are as follow:
- Safety: to limit contact voltage and provide a return path in the event of a fault to ground;
- EMC: to have zero potential and equipotentiality, which provide a shielding effect.

23
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
ACCORDING TO IEC 61537 STANDARD

1. Terms and definition:


1.1 C
 able tray system or cable ladder system assembly of cable supports consisting of cable tray lengths or cable ladder
lengths and other systems components.
1.2 System Component
part used with in the system components are as follows:
a) Cable tray length or cable ladder length
b) Cable tray fitting or cable ladder fitting
c) Support device
d) Mounting device
e) System accessory
1.3 Fitting
System component used to join, change direction, change dimension or terminate cable tray length (couplers, bends,
tees, crosses).
1.4 Support device
System component designed to provide mechanical support and which may limit movement of cable runway.
1.5 Mounting device
System component used to attach or fix other devices to the cable runway.
1.6 Internal fixing device
Device for joining and for fixing system components to other system components.
1.7 External fixing device
Device used for fixing a support device to walls, ceiling or other structural parts.

2. Mechanical properties:
2.1 Mechanical strength: SFSP cable tray systems and cable ladder systems provide adequate mechanical strength.
The SWL (safe working load) has been tested .The load has been increased to 1.7 times the SWL (according to IEC).

3. Electrical properties:
3.1 Electrical continuity
Cable tray system and cable ladder systems have adequate electrical continuity to ensure equipotential bonding and
connections to earth.
3.2 Electrical non-conductivity
Cable tray system components and cable ladder system components have been declared electrically non conductive.
An overall accuracy of surface resistance has been guarantee: surface resistivity= Rx X p/g
�= surface resistivity in Ohm, Rx = Measured surface Resistance, P = twice the width of cable tray (mm), g = Distance
between electrodes in mm.

All necessary information for a proper and safe installation and use of the cable tray system and cable ladder system has
been provided. The safe working load and impact resistance is valid for the whole temperature declared.
The information include:
a) Instructions for the assembly and installation of system components and for the precautions required to avoid
excessive transverse deflection which could cause damage to the cables.

Transverse deflection:
Vertical deflection across the width of the base area, omitting the longitudinal deflection, when mounted horizontally.
The transverse deflection of each span at the safe working load shall not exceed 1/20th of the cantilever.

Mid-Span deflection:
The practical mid-span deflection as SWL shall not exceed 1/100th of the span.
If the span is greater than the cable tray length or cable ladder the joint shall be placed at min span.

24
CABLE LADDER SYSTEMS

Product footprint
Cable ladder — accessory foot print standard radius is 300 mm.

90 Degree Flat Bend Crossover

Equal Tee Unequal Tee

Outside Riser Central


or Right/
Left
Hand
Reducer

Footprints are identical for all ranges

25
NEMA SELECTION PROCESS
The following factors shall be considered when determining the appropriate Cable Trays Systems:

• Materials and Finishes


• Types of Cable Trays • Lengths of Straight Sections
• NEMA Classification • Radii of Fittings
• NEMA Classes • Cable Tray Support Locations
• Cavity Size – Load Depth/Width of Tray • Electrical Grounding

26
NEMA CLASSIFICATION
The National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA VE-1) USA, classifications for Cable Trays were established to
simplify and standardize the specifications of Cable Trays.
 
This classification is based on the working load (the total weight of the cables), and the support span (the distance be-
tween supports).

Cable Load/Working Load


The Cable load or the working load is the total weight of the cables to be placed in the tray.

The NEMA classes are based on cable loads of 50Lbs/Ft., (74 kg/m), 75Lbs/Ft. (112 kg/m), and 100Lbs/Ft. (149 kg/m) .

This is the total weight of cables in the tray.

For purposes of selecting a suitable tray, this weight shall be rounded off to the next higher NEMA working (allowable)
load.

Support Spans
Support span is the distance between the supports.

The NEMA standard support spans are based on 8’ (2.4m), 12’ (3.7m), 16’ (4.9m) and 20’ (6.0m).

NEMA CLASSES
The following table summarizes the NEMA classes based on cable/working load and support span described previously.

Table 1

NEMA Load/Span Designations


Support Span Feet Working Load
Class Designation
Feet m Lbs./Ft. Kg/m

8A 8 2.4 50 74
8B 8 2.4 75 112
8C 8 2.4 100 149
12A 12 3.7 50 74
12B 12 3.7 75 112
12C 12 3.7 100 149
16A 16 4.9 50 74
16B 16 4.9 75 112
16C 16 4.9 100 149
20A 20 6.0 50 74
20B 20 6.0 75 112
20C 20 6.0 100 149
D 20 6.0 45 67

27
NEMA CLASSES

Other Loading Considerations


Destruction Load Capacity
The total weight in the tray which causes the tray to collapse, is called the “destruction load capacity”. When trays do
collapse, they generally do so by premature lateral buckling (compression) of the top flange.

Concentrated Loads
A concentrated load is a static weight applied between the side rails at mid span. When specified, these concentrated
static loads may be converted to an equivalent uniform load (We), in pounds per linear foot or Kg/m, using the following
formula:
We = 2 x Concentrated Load
Support Span in mm

This load is added to the static weight of the cable before selecting the appropriate NEMA load span designation.
Please note per the NEMA VE-1 guidelines all SFSP Cable Trays are labeled as follows:

WARNING!
!
DO NOT USE AS A WALKWAY, LADDER OR SUPPORT
www.sfsp-ikk.com
FOR PERSONNEL. TO BE USED ONLY AS A MECHANICAL
SUPPORT FOR CABLES AND TUBING.

Order Reference: SFSP0010 CL


Cable Tray Systems

Part Number : CTMCL100-200C

NEMA VE-1 LOAD CLASS

Safety Factor
All loads stated in the selection charts have a 1.5 safety factor, in accordance with the NEMA VE-1 guidelines.
A safety factor is the reserve strength, above the actual cable loading, for which a tray system was designed.

Conversion of Safety Factor from 1.5 to 2.0


The loads stated in the selection charts have a safety factor of 1.5 per the NEMA VE-1 guidelines. To convert the load
carrying capabilities, as listed in these charts, to a 2.0 safety factor, multiply the stated loads by 0.75.

Testing Methods
Loading data stated in the catalogue have been derived from actual testing of the tray systems, or by means of structural
calculations. These figures are based on simple beam calculation, per the NEMA VE-1 guidelines.

28
When tray is supported as a simple beam, the load causes bending moments all along the beam resulting in deflection,
called sag, inducing stress in the beam. The material above the longitudinal center line (neutral axis) is compressed.

Material below, is stretched and is in tension. The maximum stress in a simple beam is at the center of the span. Failure
of Cable Trays will occur in compression before tension. This is why tray rails often have stiffened top flanges.

A simple beam is present when a single straight section of tray is supported on each end. When a series of straight
sections are connected and supported by more than one support it is referred to as a continuous beam. The NEMA VE-1
standards consider only a simple beam for testing purposes, due to the following reasons:

1. It requires maximum properties for a given load and support spacing.


2. It is the easiest when it comes to approximation by calculation.
3. It represents the most severe or worst case loading.
4. Destruction load capacities can be easily verified.

Deflection vs. Economy


Ladder Cable Trays meet all performance and dimensional criteria with safety factor. When deflection limitations are
imposed, a less economical tray system may result. If deflection is a concern, SFSP recommends these maximum limits
for the optimum design.

e u tral
N
Axis
DEFLECTION
DEFLECTION

Simple Beam Span


Table 2 Continuous beams (such as installed tray)
)m 3.60( ’12 )m 6.00( ’20
deflect approximately as much as 1⁄2 of Welded
STEEL 1/100 1/75 Ladder Cable Trays of simple beams.
ALUMINUM 1/75 1/50

29
CAVITY SIZE–LOAD DEPTH/WIDTH OF TRAY

The size of the Cable Trays cavity is determined specifically by the electrical requirements and the by the specific
cables being used to meet those requirements.
Article 318 of the NEC (ANSI / NFPA 70) lists the specific requirements concerning allowable cable fill. It is
imperative in welded Ladder Cable Trays that the size of the cavity meets the conditions set forth by the NEC,
specifically:
• Types of cables allowed in which type of Cable Trays
• Requirements for arranging the cables in the trays.

Select the Fittings


Fittings are used to change the size or direction of the Cable Trays. The most important decision to be made in fitting
design concerns radius. The radius of the bend, whether horizontal or vertical, can be 305mm, 607mm, 914mm and
1219mm, or even greater on a custom basis. The selection requires a compromise with the considerations being
available space, minimum bending radius of cables, ease of cable pulling, and cost. The typical radius is 607mm. When a
standard angle will not work, field fittings or adjustable elbows can be used. It may be necessary to add supports to the
tray at these points. Refer to NEMA VE2 Installation Guidelines for suggested support locations. Note that fittings are
not subject to NEMA/CSA load ratings.

30
Location of Couplings
Since different bending moments are created in each span, there is no simple factor to approximate deflection as the
number of spans increases. It is possible to calculate these deflections at any given point by using second integration of
the basic differential equation for beams. Testing shows that the center span of a three-tray continuous beam can deflect
less than 10 % of its simple beam deflection.

Couplers at 1/4 from Support Span


The support span cant be greater than the straight section length, to ensure no more than one splice is located between
supports.

Location of Couplers. The location of the coupler dramatically affects the deflection of a cable tray system under equal
loading conditions. Testing indicates that the maximum deflection of the center span of a three-span tray run can
decrease four times if the couplers are moved from one-quarter span to above the supports. This can be a major concern
for designers considering modular systems for tray and pipe racks.

Support Locations for Fittings

1/4 span

L L L

31
CAVITY SIZE–LOAD DEPTH/WIDTH OF TRAY

The NEC breaks down the allowable cable fill into three main categories:

• Multi-Conductor:
The number of multi-conductor cables rated at 2000 volts or less in Cable Trays.

• Single conductor:
The number of single conductor cables rated at 2000 volts or less in Cable Trays.

• MV and MC Cables:


The number of MV & MC cables rated at 2001 volts or over in the Cable Trays.

Cable fill guidelines set forth by the NEC are generally based on limiting heat build-up in the trays.
Where data or communications type cables are being installed, heat is not a critical issue and the allowable fill is
determined by the total cross sectional area of the tray cavity:
Total Cross Sectional Area = (Width) x (Load Depth).

LENGTHS OF STRAIGHT SECTIONS


Cable Trays are available in 12’(3.7m) and 24’(7.4m) lengths in accordance with the NEMA Standards.
Customized lengths are also available upon request.
The following factors need to be considered when specifying the lengths of the trays:

Support Span
• The support span shall not be greater than the tray length. This ensures that the two splice plate connections will not
fall within one support span.

Space Constraints
• When installing trays in a limited space, as often encountered in commercial applications, 10’ (3.0m) and 12’ (3.7m)
lengths of tray are easier to handle and therefore are better suited for those applications.

Labor Costs
• Where trays are being installed in an industrial facility, where space is not a significant issue, handling 20’ (6.1m) and
24’ (7.4m) lengths may be more economical. In this instance, half as many tray connections need to be made.
Additionally, if the proper tray system is specified, support spans may be lengthened.

RADIUS OF FITTINGS
Cable Tray fittings are used to change directions both horizontally and vertically.

The standard radii for Cable Tray fittings are 12”(305mm), 24”(610mm), and 36”(915mm).

The radii of the fittings shall be based upon minimum bending radius of the cables.

This information can be obtained from the cable manufacturer.

Based on the total number of cables to be placed in the tray it may be more practical to use the next higher radius.

32
CABLE TRAY SUPPORT POSITIONS

Straight Sections
A general rule of thumb is that the splice plates shall not fall beyond the 1⁄4 point of the span, or the distance between
supports. For example: On a 20 (6.1m) support span, the splice plates shall not be further than 5’ (1.5m) away from
the support location. Under no circumstances shall two Cable Tray splices fall between any pair of supports. For special
applications, mid-span splice plates can be furnished. Please contact the factory.

Fittings
Supports for Cable Tray elbows are critical. It is important to note that the Cable Tray will come under its greatest stress
when cables are being pulled into the tray. Therefore, proper placement of supports is necessary to ensure that the
integrity of the tray system is maintained during the cable pulling operation.
The diagrams on page 2-10 show the recommended support locations for fittings.

Thermal Expansion and Contraction


It is important to use expansion connectors when installing long runs of Cable Trays. The number of expansion connectors
required will depend on:
(1) the maximum temperature difference
(2) the tray material being installed
Expansion Connectors allow 1” (2.5cm) of travel. This table illustrates how often expansion splice plates shall be used.

Expansion
Expansion Regular Splice Plate
Splice Plate Splice Plate

Expansion Firm Expansion


Guides Hold-Down Guides

CABLE TRAY SUPPORT POSITIONS


The below mentioned table is used to determine the proper gap setting between trays. The metal temperature determines
the proper gap setting at the time of installation. Establish maximum and minimum temperatures in summer and winter
for the area. Draw a line connecting them. Using the metal temperature at time of installation (C° or F°) draw a horizontal
to temperature slope and plot straight down to find the gap distance at expansion joint. This diagram illustrates the
proper installation of an expansion system. It is important to note that Ladder Cable Trays grounding straps are required
when expansion connections are made. This will ensure proper grounding continuity.
MAX. TEMP.
MIN. TEMP.
130
50

110
METAL TEMPERATURE AT TIME OF INSTALLATION (FO or CO)

40

Temperature Distance between Expansion Joints

SFSP
90
30
Difference Steel Aluminum Copper
70
TE
20 M
PE
RA
25°F (14°C) 512’ (156m) 260’ (79m) 363’ (111m)
TU
10 50 RE 50°F (28°C) 256’ (78m) 130’ (40m) 182’ (55m)
Table 3

SL
O
0
PE
75°F (42°C) 171’ (52m) 87’ (27m) 121’ (37m)
30

100°F (56°C) 128’ (39m) 65’ (20m) 90’ (27m)


-10 10
125°F (70°C) 102' (31m) 52’ (16m) 72’ (22m)
-20
-10 150°F (83°C) 85’ (26m) 43’ (13m) 60’ (18m)
-30
175°F (97°C) 73’ (22m) 37’ (11m) 52’ (16m)
-30

-40
CO FO
0 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1
(0.0) (3.2) (6.3) (9.5) (12.7) (15.9) (19.0) (22.2) (25.4)
GAP SETTING, INCHES (MM)

33
ELECTRICAL GROUNDING
NEC (ANSI / NFPA 70), Article 318-7 allows for Cable Trays to be used as an equipment grounding conductor in commercial
and industrial establishments. The following table lists specific ampere ratings and the minimum cross sectional area
requirements for each rating.

SFSP produces Cable Tray Systems which meet the National Electrical Code (ANSI/NFPA 70), these can be used for any
project worldwide except where another standard may take precedence, such as the Canadian Standards Association
(CSA).

When required, Cable Trays can be installed per the Canadian Electrical Code Parts I and II (CEC). Trays and splice plates
meet the bonding requirements of the CSA Standards and the CEC.

The cross-sectional area for each Cable Trays System, straight sections and fittings can be found on the appropriate
selection charts contained within this publication. In addition, all Cable Trays, straight sections and fittings are supplied
with pressure sensitive labels indicating the cross sectional area of both side rails, as required by the (NEC) National
Electrical Code.

Table 4

Minimum Cross Sectional Area of


Aluminum Cable Trays
Metal* Steel Cable Trays
Max. Fuse Amp Rating Circuit Breaker Amp Trip Setting or Relay
Amp Trip Setting for Ground Fault Protection of any Cable Trays
Circuit In the Cable Trays Systems In2 mm2 In2 mm2

60 0.2 129 0.2 129


100 0.4 258 0.2 129
200 0.7 452 0.2 129
400 1 645 0.4 258
600 1.50** 968 0.4 258
1,000 - 0.6 387
1,200 - 1 645
1,600 - 1.5 968
2,000 - 2.00** 1,290

*Total cross sectional area of both side rails for ladder trough type trays, or the minimum cross-sectional area for metal in channel type Cable Trays
or Cable Trays of one piece construction.

Bonding Jumpers / Straps


Cable Tray connections made with standard rigid splice plates, these rigid type connections do not require electrical
bonding straps. Electrical bonding straps are required where Cable Trays are joined by connectors which allow movement,
such as: vertical adjustable connectors, horizontal adjustable connectors and expansion connectors.

Proper grounding is also necessary where Cable Trays run parallel to each other, are stacked upon one another and in
other instances where tray runs are discontinuous.

Summary
You are now ready to select the best Cable Trays System to meet your needs. By now, we hope you’ve decided to select
the system using the NEMA CLASSIFICATION (8A, 12B, 20C, etc.) which makes your work so much easier.

Selection is also possible using physical dimensions, performance or any combination of these data listed NEMA oriented.

34
CABLE SPECIFICATIONS
Most cable manufacturers offer a very accurate method of calculating cable weights, and appropriates lists or tables can
be obtained from them.

Important: The tables only provide a rough overview. They are average values, which may vary from manufacturer to
manufacturer. Please refer to the manufacturer‘s specifications for the exact values.

Actual cable weights of different cable types

Insulated power cables Insulated power cables Telecommunication Cables


Cable load Cable load Cable load Cable load
Type Type Type Type
kg/m kg/m kg/m kg/m

1x4 0.08 1 x 10 0.18 4 x 50 2.3 2 x 2 x 0,6 0.03


1x6 0.105 1 x 16 0.24 4 x 70 3.1 4 x 2 x 0,6 0.035
1 x 10 0.155 1 x 25 0.35 4 x 95 4.2 6 x 2 x 0,6 0.05
1 x 16 0.23 1 x 35 0.46 4 x 120 5.2 10 x 2 x 0,6 0.065
1 x 25 0.33 1 x 50 0.6 4 x 150 6.4 20 x 2 x 0,6 0.11
3 x 1.5 0.135 1 x 70 0.8 4 x 185 8.05 40 x 2 x 0,6 0.2
3 x 2.5 0.19 1 x 95 1.1 4 x 240 11 60 x 2 x 0,6 0.275
3x4 0.265 1 x 120 1.35 5 x 1,5 0.27 100 x 2 x 0,6 0.445
4 x 1.5 0.16 1 x 150 1.65 5 x 2,5 0.35 200 x 2 x 0,6 0.87
4 x 2.5 0.23 1 x 185 2 5x6 0.61 2 x 2 x 0,8 0.04
4x4 0.33 1 x 240 2.6 5 x 10 0.55 4 x 2 x 0,8 0.055
4x6 0.46 1 x 300 3.2 5 x 16 1.25 6 x 2 x 0,8 0.08
4 x 10 0.69 3 x 1,5 0.19 5 x 25 1.95 10 x 2 x 0,8 0.115
4 x 16 1.09 3 x 2,5 0.24 5 x 35 2.4 20 x 2 x 0,8 0.205
4 x 25 1.64 3 x 10 0.58 5 x 50 3.5 40 x 2 x 0,8 0.38
4 x 35 2.09 3 x 16 0.81 60 x 2 x 0,8 0.54
5 x 5.1 0.19 3 x 50 1.8 100 x 2 x 0,8 0.875
5 x 2.5 0.27 3 x 70 2.4 200 x 2 x 0,8 1.79
5x4 0.41 3 x 120 4
5x6 0.54 4 x 1,5 0.22
5 x 10 0.85 4 x 2,5 0.29
5 x 16 1.35 4x6 0.4
5 x 25 1.99 4 x 16 1.05
7 x 1.5 0.24 4 x 25 1.6
7 x 2.5 0.35 4 x 35 1.75

IT cables type cat Coax cable (Standard)


Cable load
Type Type Cable load kg/m
kg/m
Cat. 5/Cat. 6 0.06 SAT/BK cable 0.06

35
CABLE SPECIFICATIONS
External diameter and cross section

Insulated power cables Insulated power cables Telecommunication Cables


Useful cross- Useful cross- Useful cross-section
Type Ø mm Type Ø mm Type Ø mm
section cm² section cm² cm²

1x4 6.50 0.42 1 x 10 10.50 1.10 2 x 2 x 0,6 5.00 0.25


1x6 7.00 0.49 1 x 16 11.50 1.32 4 x 2 x 0,6 5.60 0.30
1 x 10 8.00 0.64 1 x 25 12.50 1.32 6 x 2 x 0,6 6.50 0.42
1 x 16 9.50 0.90 1 x 35 13.50 1.82 10 x 2 x 0,6 7.50 0.56
1 x 25 12.50 1.56 1 x 50 15.50 2.40 20 x 2 x 0,6 9.00 0.81
3 x 1.5 8.50 0.72 1 x 70 16.50 2.72 40 x 2 x 0,6 11.00 1.12
3 x 2.5 9.50 0.90 1 x 95 18.50 3.42 60 x 2 x 0,6 13.00 1.69
3x4 11.00 1.21 1 x 120 20.50 4.20 100 x 2 x 0,6 17.00 2.89
4 x 1.5 9.00 0.81 1 x 150 22.50 5.06 200 x 2 x 0,6 23.00 5.29
4 x 2.5 10.50 1.10 1 x 185 25.00 6.25 2 x 2 x 0,8 6.00 0.36
4x4 2.50 1.54 1 x 240 28.00 7.84 4 x 2 x 0,8 7.00 0.49
4x6 13.50 1.82 1 x 300 30.00 9.00 6 x 2 x 0,8 8.50 0.72
4 x 10 16.50 2.72 3 x 1,5 11.50 1.32 10 x 2 x 0,8 9.50 0.90
4 x 16 19.00 3.61 3 x 2,5 12.50 1.56 20 x 2 x 0,8 13.00 1.69
4 x 25 23.50 5.52 3 x 10 17.50 3.06 40 x 2 x 0,8 16.50 2.72
4 x 35 26.00 6.76 3 x 16 19.50 3.80 60 x 2 x 0,8 20.00 4.00
5 x 5.1 9.50 0.90 3 x 50 26.00 6.76 100 x 2 x 0,8 25.50 6.50
5 x 2.5 11.00 1.21 3 x 70 30.00 9.00 200 x 2 x 0,8 32.00 10.24
5x4 13.50 1.82 3 x 120 36.00 12.96
5x6 14.50 2.10 4 x 1,5 12.50 1.56
5 x 10 18.00 3.24 5 x 2,5 13.50 1.82
5 x 16 21.50 4.62 4x6 16.50 2.72
5 x 25 26.00 6.76 4 x 10 18.50 3.42
7 x 1.5 10.50 1.10 4 x 16 21.50 4.62
7 x 2.5 13.00 1.69 4 x 25 25.50 6.50
4 x 35 28.00 7.84
4 x 50 30.00 9.00
4 x 70 34.00 11.56
4 x 95 39.00 15.21
4 x 120 42.00 17.64
4 x 150 47.00 22.00
4 x 185 52.00 27.00
4 x 240 58.00 33.60
5 x 1,5 13.50 1.82
5 x 2,5 14.50 2.10
5x6 18.50 3.42
5 x 10 20.50 4.20
5 x 16 22.50 5.06
5 x 25 27.50 7.65
5 x 35 34.00 11.56
5 x 50 40.00 16.00

36
The choice is made under consideration of:
1- The number of cable to be passed in a Cable Tray (Load carrying capacity of the tray).
2- The load of cable to be passed in a cable tray and support distance.

Cable Capacity
For the estimation of cable area, the table shown below is used to help.

Table 1

Space needed for cable to type NYY for example:


Cable Diameter Area per cable x Number of cable Usable area
NYY mm cm² cm²

4 x 1,5 12,5 1,5 x 1 1,5


4 x 2,5 14,0 1,8 x 1 1,8
4 x 6,0 16,5 3,0 x 1 3,0
4 x 16 22 5,0 x 1 5,0
4 x 35 31 12,0 x 1 12,0
4 x 70 41 16,0 x 1 16,0
A ≥ ∑ 39,30 cm²

For cables of any size the area per cable is multiplied with the number of cables the sum(A) is the total area of the cables.
The result is the needed cross section area of the Cable Tray (which may have to be extended by a standby factor).

Example
For the cable shown in table 1 (using 1 cable of each type) we need min. a Cable tray of 40,0 cm² + standby factor.

Cable Weight

Table 2

Weight of cables type NYY (Power Cable) To determine the total


Cable Cable weight Number of Total weight weight, each cable weight
x = is multiplied with the its
Cable Load F = ∑ 71,3 N/m

NYY N/m Cables (variable) N/m


number. The result is the
4 x 1,5 1,6 x 1 = 1,6 estimated cable load (F).
4 x 2,5 2,3 x 1 = 2,3 The highest possible
4 x 6,0 4,6 x 1 = 4,6 cable load is decisive.
4 x 16 10,9 x 1 = 10,9 This is calculated by
multiplication of the
4 x 35 20,9 x 1 = 20,9
usable diameter with the
4 x 70 31,0 x 1 = 31,0
specific cable weight.

According to DIN VDE 0639


In order to choose
construction pieced
Type of Cable support Cable Specific Cable weight
of sufficient weight
Cable Ladder Control line cables Usable section x 2,8N/m x cm² load ability, the load
Cable Tray Voltage line cables Usable sectionx1,5 N/m x cm² of each Cable Tray or
Cable Ladder at the
Supporting structures support point has to
be determined.
The supporting structures for Cable Tray or Cable Ladder contain
a) On walls: of bracket support or wall bracket
b) On ceiling: of ceiling bracket support

37
CABLE
LADDERS
SYSTEM
Technical Information

LADDER CABLE TRAYS REQUIREMENTS DESIGN

Nomenclature
1. Ladder Cable Trays 11. Vertical Bend
2. Ventilated Cable Trays 12. Vertical Tee
3. Joint Plate / Fish Plate 13. Left Reducer
4. 90°Horizontal Bend 14. Frame Type Box Connector
5. 45°Horizontal Bend 15. Barrier Strip
6. Horizontal Tee 16. Solid Flanged Tray Cover
7. Horizontal Cross 17. Channel Straight Section
8. 90°Vertical Outside Bend 18. Channel Cable Trays, 90°Vertical Outside
9. 45°Vertical Outside Bend 19. Expansion Connectors
10. 45°Vertical Inside Bend

40
ALUMINUM SWAGED TUBULAR LADDER CABLE
TRAYS
Is a structure consisting of two side rails, connected by individual rungs and is manufactured in accordance with NEMA
Standard #VE-1. Rungs are fastened to the side members by an exclusive swaging process. This assembly method ensures
a superior mechanical and electrical connection.

RUNG SPACING
(center-to-center)
RUNG

TOP FLANGE
SIDE RAIL (stiffened
type shown)
LOAD
DEPTH
SIDE RAIL

SIDE RAIL BOTTOM FLANGE


HEIGHT
LENGTH
WIDTH

Side Members
• Side members are designed with top and bottom flanges turned outwards. This simplifies fastening the Cable Trays to
the supports. Cable Trays with outward facing flanges allow complete access within the cable loading area and eliminate
the possibility of cable damage from sharp edges within the cable area. The return on the top flange strengthens the
side member and allows cables to be smoothly dropped over the side.

Rung
• Ladder rungs are 1.00”(25mm) diameter tubings flattened on top to provide a cable bearing surface.
This construction allows cables to drop out anywhere without contacting a sharp edge.

Rung Spacing
• The interval at which rungs are swaged to the side member. This is measured from center line of rung to center line
of rung.
SFSP manufactures straight lengths with four standard rung spacings: 6”(150mm), 9”(229mm), 12”(305mm) and
18”(457mm).
Rung spacing is generally determined by the size and type of the cable being supported. When in doubt, 9”(229mm)
rung spacing is a generally accepted compromise.

Length
• The longitudinal dimensions of standard Ladder Cable Trays are 10’(3.0m), 12’(3.7m), 20’(6.1m) and 24’(7.4m).

Width
• The transverse dimensions of Ladder Cable Trays are measured inside (from side member web to side member web)
and are furnished in seven standard widths: 6”(150mm), 9”(229mm), 12”(305mm), 18”(457mm), 24”(610mm),
30”(750mm) and 36”(915mm).

Overall Width
• Overall ladder width is equal to the inside or nominal width plus the width of the side member flanges.

41
Technical Information

ALUMINUM SWAGED TUBULAR LADDER CABLE


TRAYS
Load Depth
• Measured from top surface of rung to the top of the side member. This is not to be confused with the overall height.
SFSP manufactures four loading depths: 3”(75mm), 4”(100mm), 5”(125mm) and 6”(150mm) in accordance with NEMA
Standard VE-1.

Overall Height
• Overall height is equal to the loading depth plus 1.25”(30mm).

Fittings
• For changing direction horizontally and vertically, SFSP manufactures elbows, tees and crosses in all widths and loading
depths. Fittings are available in three standard radii; 12”(305mm), 24”(610mm) and 36”(915mm). Maintain a nominal
9”(229mm) rung spacing through the center line of all fittings.

Swaged Rounded Tubular Ladder Cable Trays Features:

1. Universal Curvilinear Splice Plate System


The splice plates for rigid connections have a slight curve so that they can be used on straight sections or fittings.
Tightening of the fastener pulls the plate flush with the side rail ,which makes the fasteners snug and the joint becomes
superior structurally and electrically. Even when hand-tight, there is pressure on the fastener to hold it securely.
Note: Heavy Duty and Mid Span Splice Plates are available upon request .

2. New Zero Tangent Fittings


Tangent as referred to on Cable Tray fittings is the straight part at the end of the curve to accommodate a flat splice plate.
This wastes space in tightly packed areas, such as spreader rooms, where the heat of thousands of cables accumulate.
Eliminating tangents allows more tray runs to distribute the heat. Zero tangent fittings can save up to 12‘ (3.7m) per row
of tray.

BONUS: Inspection of proper installation of splice plates is done visually. If the plate is bowed away from the rail, the
nuts shall be tightened.

3. Swaged Rung Ladder Cable Trays System Process


The heart of the design is the tubular rung and its connection to the side rail by cold swaging, a process where special
machinery compresses and locks the tubular rung material around both the inside and outside of the Cable Trays’ side
rails.
This connection is made without the use of heat which can potentially disturb the molecular structure of the metal and
weaken it.
The tubular rung is flattened during the swaging process to ensure a proper cable bearing surface.

42
Testing
The superior strength of the swaged Ladder Cable Trays system has been verified in independent testing conducted by
the Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory. Pullout loads of 2500 lbs(1134 kg) were reached. Other tests show that the same type
of rungs, when welded, had a 35% lower pullout load. The strength of the swage also maintains the 90° relationship of
the rungs to the side rail. The tubular rungs, which are very stiff, transmit the cable loads to the side rails resulting in
much lesser deflection than in a similar system with welded rungs.
For a copy of the independent test results, please contact the factory.

Swage Advantages

• Swaging allows the side rails to be turned outwards, simplifying cable installation and providing 100% access to the
cables. Cold swaging yields the most rigid tray systems in the industry. The swaged rung connection resists stresses in
all directions: up or down, side to side or in and out. The swaged ladder also resists the camber and warping effects
encountered in a typical welde
system.

The increased rigidity means that a 24’(7.4m) section of tray can be lifted on one end with little or no twisting or
bending of the tray section. This rigid construction makes the trays safer for field personnel to handle and reduces
shipping damage.

Electrical Properties
• Electrically, the 106 tons of pressure in the swaging process virtually eliminates the interstices and a homogenous
electrical path results in the following:
Resistance of Aluminum Swaged Tray: 31 microhms
Resistance of Steel Swaged Tray: 37.3 microhms
 Resistance of Popular Aluminum Welded Tray: 101 microhms

Conclusion
• Cold swaging yields a very strong, efficient and aesthetically pleasing system that stands the test of time and offers
installation savings due to its ease of handling.
Technical Information

STEEL LADDER CABLE TRAYS

Rung spacing

Top flange Side rail

Side
rail Side rail
height web

Bottom
Wid flange
th
th
ng
Le Rounded Tubular
Rung Slotted C-Channel Rung

Is a prefabricated metal structure consisting of reinforced Welded Ladder Cable Trays -shaped rungs, arc welded
to the side rails and is manufactured according to NEMA Standard VE-1. Welded Ladder Cable Trays’ rungs are
fastened to the side rails with an automatic, self-indexing MIG-arc-welding system, plug welding a 0.5”(12.5mm)
diameter zone. The superior strength of the plug weld withstands the rigors of shipping, handling, erection and
cable support service.

Side Members
Welded Ladder Cable Trays’ side members are designed with top and bottom flanges turned inwards. This minimizes
the space requirements of the Cable Trays Systems, and allows a very low side rail height for each NEMA Standard VE-1
load depth.

Slotted Rungs
Slotted shaped rungs are provided on trays 6”(150mm), 9”(229mm), 12”(305mm), 18”(457mm) and 24”(610mm) wide.
All slotted rungs are 2.5”(63mm), and provide a 1.25”(30mm) cable bearing surface. Slots provide a neat, convenient
option for cable tie down requirements. Slots are 5⁄16”(6.25mm) wide and 5⁄8”(12.5mm) in length, and are located on
1”(25mm) centers across the entire width of the rung

Solid Rungs
S olid shaped Rungs are provided on trays 30”(750mm) and 36”(915mm) wide. Solid Rungs for steel trays are 2.25”(58mm)
wide and provide a 7⁄8”(22mm) cable bearing surface.

Rung Spacing
SFSP manufactures straight lengths with four standard rung spacings; 6”(150mm), 9”(229mm), 12”(305mm)
and 18”(457mm). The 6”(150mm) rung spacing results in a 3.75”(94mm) opening between rungs allowing the tray to be
classified as a ventilated trough per NEMA Standard VE-1.

Length
The longitudinal dimensions of standard Welded Ladder Cable Trays are 10’(3.0m), 12’(3.7m), 20’(6.1m) and 24’(7.4m).

Width
The transverse dimensions of Welded Ladder Cable Trays are measured from the inside and are furnished in seven
standard widths: 6”(150mm), 9”(229mm), 12”(305mm), 18”(457mm), 24”(610mm), 30”(750mm) and 36”(915mm).

44
Upside Downside

Overall Width
Overall tray width is equal to the inside or nominal width plus the thickness of the two side rail webs. Overall Tray Width
= Nominal + 3⁄16”(5mm) Width.

Load Depth
Measured from the top surface of the rungs to the top of the side member.
SFSP manufactures four load depths; 2 7⁄8”(73mm), 3 5⁄8”(101mm), 4 5⁄8”(127mm) and 5 5⁄8”(153mm) corresponding
to the four nominal load depths in NEMA Standard 1”(25mm), 3”(75mm), 4”(100mm), 5” (125mm) and 6”(150mm).

Overall Height
Welded Ladder Cable Trays’ overall height is equal to the load depth plus 1.25”(30mm).

Fittings
For changing direction both horizontally and vertically, SFSP manufactures tees and crosses in all widths and load depths.
Standard fittings maintain a nominal 9”(229mm) rung spacing through the center line of the fitting.

45
Technical Information

STEEL LADDER CABLE TRAYS


Welded Ladder Cable Tray Features:
1. Compact Economical System
Welded Ladder Cable Trays are an extremely compact economical flange in Cable Trays Systems which allow the designer
to utilize these Cable Trays in tight locations. The extremely low profile Welded Ladder Cable Trays Rungs (5⁄8” high)
minimize the required side rail height while maintaining NEMA Standard VE-1 nominal load depths. Overall system
height is only 5⁄8” greater than the actual load depth.

2. Universal Curvilinear Splice Plate System


T he splice plates for rigid connections have a slight curve so they can be used on straight sections or fittings. Tightening
of the fastener pulls the plate flush with the side rail. The fasteners are snug and the joint is superior structurally and
electrically. Even when hand-tight, there is pressure on the fastener to hold it securely.
Note: Heavy Duty and Mid Span Splice Plates are available upon request.

3. Zero Tangent Fittings


“Tangent” as referred to on Cable Tray fittings is the straight part at the end of the curve to accommodate a flat splice
plate.
This wastes space in tightly packed areas, such as spreader rooms, where the heat of thousands of cables accumulate.
Eliminating tangents allows more tray runs to distribute the heat.

Bonus: Inspection of proper installation of splice plates is done visually.


If the plate is bowed away from the rail, nuts shall be tightened.

4. Welded Assembly System


• Welded Ladder Cable Trays rungs on straight sections are assembled to the side rails using an automatic, self indexing
MIG-arcwelding system fusing a 0.5”(12.5mm) diameter zone.
These welds are 700% larger and stronger than the common resistance (spot) weld in use today. Electrical properties
of the assembly are unequalled; are well within the NEMA requirements due to the continuous electrical path.
The mechanical strength of this welded assembly withstands the rigors of shipping, handling, erection and service.
The size of the weld keeps the vertical axis of the side rail from sloping inwards under load.
The weld maintains the 90° angle between the side rail and bottom. This allows full use of the section properties.
Spot welds do not permit this. Also, stresses on spot welds (barely 1⁄8” (3mm) in diameter) are so severe that breakage
often occurs during shipping and erection. Welded Ladder Cable Trays fittings are also assembled by MIG-arc welding.

46
CABLE LADDER TRAY SYSTEMS OVERVIEW

SFSP’s Cable Tray Systems are available in a variety of finishes, and in varying width and load depth for many
applications including primary service entrances, main power feeders, branch wirings, instruments and
communications cables.

Applications:

- Industrials: Gas facilities - Commercials: Shopping Centers


Oil facilities Control Buildings
Power Plants Schools
Petrochemical Plants Hospitals
Automotive Plants Office Buildings
Paper Plants Airports
Food Processing Stadiums
Power Plants
Refineries
Manufacturing
Mining

Features:
• Rounded side rail flanges protect cables.
• All designs permit easy cable dropout with no sharp edges to damage insulation.
• Slotted C-Channel rungs allow simple cable fastening.
• High strength splices allow random locations between supports (full sections used on all simple beams).
• Standard straight section length is 3000 mm.
• Complete line of fittings and accessories.

Ladder Cable Trays consist of two longitudinal side rails connected by rungs. SFSP‘s designs are very popular due to their
versatility and low costs. They also provide: maximum ventilation for conductor cooling, smooth edges on side rails and
rungs to protect cables and slots for easy cable fastening when required. Various rung spacings are available to provide
support for most cables, from small flexible cables to the most rigid interlocked armor power cable.

47
Cable Tray Systems Overview

SWAGED LADDER CABLE TRAYS (ALUMINUM)


Aluminum 6063 T6 - Side Rails

Design Data Aluminum 6063 T6 Load Classes


Side Height Load Depth Thickness F W I Side Load Span Classes
Rail (mm) Fd (mm) (mm) (mm) cm3 cm4 Rail kg/m (m) NEMA

A1 110 80 2.0 20 8.12 46.06 A1 52 3.0 A


A2 136 106 2.0 20 11.24 78.95 A2 89 3.0 C
A3 162 132 2.0 20 14.78 123.85 A3 74 3.70 12A
A4 188 158 2.5 20 23.14 224.70 A4 134 3.70 12B

SFSP’s Swaged Ladder Cable Trays consist of 2 outside rails that are connected by a round tubular rung of 25 mm outside
diameter.
• SFSP’s Swaged Ladder Cable Trays are manufactured in widths (w): 150 mm, 225 mm, 300 mm, 450 mm, 500 mm, 600
mm, 750 mm and 900 mm.
Other dimensions are available upon request.

Tubular Rungs
The available distance spacing (S) between the rungs is 229 mm. Length (L): 2440/3000 mm.
Side height of the side rail is 110 mm, 136 mm, 162 mm and 188 mm. Other dimensions are available upon request.
Swaged Ladder Cable Trays are available in: Aluminum 6063 T6

il
Ra

Tub
Ro ular
und
ed
Ru
ng
x

48
Swaged connections
make the most rigid tray
system in the industry. RUNG

The swaging process W

does not affect the


temper and strength SIDE RAIL

of surrounding metal
the way that traditional
welding does. S S

49
Cable Tray Systems Overview

SWAGED LADDER CABLE TRAYS (ALUMINUM)

Aluminum Ladder Cable Trays - General Overview

A
L

C.Ladder Side Rail 6“ C.Ladder Side Rail 5“

20 20
9.5 9.50
20 20 5
3 3
8
5 8
8

2.50
188

153

2
162

9
127
9

188 162
85 35
85 35

25 30 40
25 30 40

C.Ladder Side Rail 4“ C.Ladder Side Rail 3“

20 20

20 9.50 20 9.50
5 3 5 3
8 8

2 2
138

110
101

75

9
9

138 110
45 30 45 30

30 40 25 30 40
25

Uni-Metal can make modifications and design materials or finishes as it deems necessary or desirable .
All illustrations, drawings and descriptive material in this publication are of a generally informative nature only, and
do not form a complete package of the specifications or description of the goods . Most of the dimensions shown are
nominal .

50
SWAGED LADDER CABLE TRAYS
(STEEL S235 JRG2)
RUNG TYPES (Swaged and Channel)
Swaged Type (Aluminum & Steel) MATERIALS
• Rounded tubular with 25 mm diameter • Pre-Galvanized / Stainless Steel (See Page 14)
• Rung standard spacing 229 mm

Channel Type (Steel) FINISHES


• Plain or slotted, and can be mounted upwards or downwards. • Hot-Dip Galvanized, Zinc Electroplating and
• Rung standard spacing 229 mm Epoxy Powder Coating. (See Page 14)

RAIL TYPES MATERIAL THICKNESS


Types of Rail: 1.50 mm 2.00 mm 2.50 mm
• C-Type, Z-Type and R-Type

Rounded Tubular -
Swaged or Welded Plain Channel (Steel) Slotted Channel (Steel)

Z-Type C-Type R-Type

51
Cable Tray Systems Overview

STEEL LADDER CABLE TRAYS


GENERAL OVERVIEW
Tubular Rounded Rung

L
RUNG

SIDE RAIL

S S

Rung Types and Dimensions

Rung Thicknesses: 1.5 mm, 2.0 mm and 2.5mm

50 mm
21 Downwards
13 X 30 mm
41
Upwards
(slots only upon request )

52
Length and Rung Spacing

Side Rail Types

Height of rail 50mm - 150mm

53
Swaged Tubular Rung
ALUMINUM 6063 T6
ALUMINUM 6063 T6
• NEMA Class A (52 kg/m by 3.0m) and 8A (95 kg/m by 2.40m)
• NEMA Class C (97.0 kg/m by 3.0 m)
• NEMA Class 12 A (74 kg/m by 3.70 m)
• NEMA Class 12 B (134 kg/m by 3.70 m)

Aluminum 6063 T6 - Side Rails

Design Data Load Classes


Side Height Load Depth Thickness F W I Side Load Span Classes
Rail (mm) Fd (mm) (mm) (mm) cm3 cm4 Rail kg/m (m) NEMA

A1 110 80 2.0 20 8.12 46.06 A1 52 3.0 A


A2 136 106 2.0 20 11.24 78.95 A2 97 3.0 C
A3 162 132 2.0 20 14.78 123.85 A3 74 3.70 12A
A4 188 158 2.5 20 23.14 224.70 A4 134 3.70 12B

T
Load Depth
Side Height

Tubular Rung

55
Ladder Type Runs | Aluminum Section

ALT - A1 (SWAGED ROUNDED TUBULAR)


ALUMINUM LADDER - Tubular Rung Aluminum 6063 T6
NEMA Class A (52 kg/m by 3,0m) Side Rail: A1 | Height: 110 mm |
Load Depth: 82 mm |Rung - Spacing: 229 mm
and 8A (95 kg/m by 2,40m)

20

Tub 9.5
Ro ular
und
ed
H

Ru
ng

W
L

Side Height: 110

Load Depth: 82
2.0

Deflection
Width Support Load
NEMA Side Rail
Distance Rung Rail
CLASS A1
A
(mm) (m) KN/m (mm) (mm) Tubular Rung

2.40 1.35 0.02 7.96


3.0 0.66 0.01 9.95
150
3.70 0.32 0.00 12.22
4.90 0.10 0.00 16.10
2.40 1.34 0.06 7.99
3.0 0.65 0.03 9.93
225
3.70 0.31 0.01 12.15
4.90 0.09 0.00 15.86
2.40 1.32 0.13 7.99
3.0 0.64 0.06 9.93
300
3.70 0.30 0.03 12.08
4.90 0.08 0.01 15.62
110 X 20 X 2.0

2.40 1.25 0.42 7.97


3.0 0.61 0.21 9.87 Rung:
450
3.70 0.29 0.10 12.31 25x1.5 mm

4.90 0.07 0.02 16.12


2.40 1.15 0.92 7.99
Other dimensions can be
3.0 0.58 0.46 9.92
manufactured and supplied upon request .
600
3.70 0.27 0.22 12.27 Order Example
Width
4.90 0.05 0.04 15.65
)mm(
2.40 1.01 1.57 7.94 Item (h) (w) Type

3.0 0.54 0.84 9.96


750 150 ALT - A1 110 150 C
3.70 0.25 0.39 12.28
4.90 0.04 0.06 16.16 225 ALT - A1 110 225 C
2.40 0.86 2.31 7.93
3.0 0.49 1.32 9.95
900 Order Example:
3.70 0.22 0.59 12.01
ALT - A1 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Side type
4.90 0.02 0.05 15.66
For more ordering details, please check page 136

56
ALT - A2 (SWAGED ROUNDED TUBULAR)
ALUMINUM LADDER - Tubular Rung Aluminum 6063 T6
NEMA Class C Side Rail: A2 | Height: 138 mm |
(97.0 kg/m by 3.0 m) Load Depth: 108 mm |Rung - Spacing: 229 mm

20
Tub
Ro ular
und
9.5
H ed
Ru
ng

W L

Load Depth: 108


Side Height: 138
2.0

Deflection
Width Support Load
NEMA Side Rail
Distance Rung Rail
CLASS A1
A
(mm) (m) KN/m (mm) (mm) Tubular Rung

2.40 2.35 0.04 7.98


3.0 1.17 0.02 9.94
150
3.70 0.59 0.01 12.18
4.90 0.22 0.00 16.29
2.40 2.32 0.13 8.00
3.0 1.16 0.06 9.96
225
3.70 0.58 0.03 12.16
4.90 0.21 0.01 16.16 Tubular Rung:
2.40 2.25 0.29 7.96 25x1.5 mm

3.0 1.1 0.15 9.95


300
3.70 0.57 0.07 12.15
4.90 0.20 0.03 16.03
138 X 20 X 2.0

2.40 2.06 0.91 8.0


3.0 1.09 0.48 10.-
450
3.70 0.55 0.24 12.23
4.90 0.18 0.08 15.80
2.40 1.85 1.55 8.00
Other dimensions can be
3.0 1.02 0.85 9.93
manufactured and supplied upon request .
Tubular Rung:
600
3.70 0.52 0.44 12.14 25x2.0 mm
Order Example
Width
4.90 0.17 0.18 16.18
)mm(
2.40 1.70 1.95 7.95 Item (h) (w) Type

3.0 0.98 1.12 10


750 150 ALT - A2 136 150 C
3.70 0.50 0.57 12.19
4.90 0.15 0.17 15.89 Tubular Rung: 225 ALT - A2 136 225 C
2.40 1.29 2.55 7.26 30x1.5 mm

3.0 0.88 1.74 9.93


900 Order Example:
3.70 0.47 0.93 12.27
ALT - A2 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Side type
4.90 0.14 0.28 16.28
For more ordering details, please check page 136

57
Ladder Type Runs | Aluminum Section

ALT - A3 (SWAGED ROUNDED TUBULAR)


ALUMINUM LADDER - Tubular Rung Aluminum 6063 T6
NEMA Class 12 A Side Rail: A3 | Height: 162 mm |
(74 kg/m by 3.70 m) Load Depth: 132 mm |Rung - Spacing: 229 mm

20
Tub
Ro ular 9.5
und
ed
H Ru
ng

W
L

Load Depth: 132


Side Height: 162
2.0

Deflection
Width Support Load
NEMA Side Rail
Distance Rung Rail
CLASS A1
A
(mm) (m) KN/m (mm) (mm) Tubular Rung

2.40 3.67 0.06 7.92


3.0 1.87 0.03 9.97
150
3.70 0.97 0.02 12.31
4.90 0.38 0.01 16.27
2.40 3.63 0.20 7.99
3.0 1.85 0.10 9.97 Tubular Rung:
225
3.70 0.96 0.05 12.32 25x1.5 mm

4.90 0.37 0.02 16.19


2.40 3.50 0.46 7.99
3.0 1.80 0.24 9.99
300
3.70 0.94 0.12 12.24
4.90 0.36 0.05 16.13
162 X 20 X 2.0

2.40 3.17 1.12 7.99


3.0 1.73 0.61 9.98 Tubular Rung:
450
3.70 0.91 0.3 12.26 25x2.0 mm

4.90 0.34 0.15 16.05


2.40 2.88 1.69 7.98
Other dimensions can be
3.0 1.64 0.96 9.95
manufactured and supplied upon request .
600
3.70 0.88 0.52 12.28 Order Example
Width
4.90 0.33 0.19 16.27
)mm(
2.40 2.45 2.14 7.07 Item (h) (w) Type

3.0 1.55 1.36 9.96 Tubular Rung:


750 150 ALT - A3 162 150 C
3.70 0.85 0.74 12.33 30x1.5 mm

4.90 0.31 0.36 16.25 225 ALT - A3 162 225 C


2.40 1.70 2.57 6.44
3.0 1.39 2.10 9.96
900 Order Example:
3.70 0.79 1.19 12.24
ALT - A3 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Side type
4.90 0.29 0.44 16.15
For more ordering details, please check page 136

58
ALT - A4 (SWAGED ROUNDED TUBULAR)
ALUMINUM LADDER - Tubular Rung Aluminum 6063 T6
NEMA Class 12 B Side Rail: A4 | Height: 138 mm |
(134 kg/m by 3.70 m) Load Depth: 158 mm |Rung - Spacing: 229 mm

Tub
20
Ro ular
und 9.5
H
ed
Ru
ng

W
L

Load Depth: 158


Side Height: 188
2.5

Deflection
Width Support Load
NEMA Side Rail
Distance Rung Rail
CLASS A1
A
(mm) (m) KN/m (mm) (mm) Tubular Rung

2.40 4.55 0.06 5.41


3.0 3.45 0.04 10.0
150
3.70 1.81 0.02 12.31
4.90 0.74 0.01 16.23
2.40 4.55 0.19 5.55
3.0 3.40 0.14 9.98 Tubular Rung:
225
3.70 1.79 0.08 12.28 25x1.5 mm

4.90 0.73 0.03 16.20


2.40 4.55 0.45 5.82
3.0 3.33 0.33 9.99
300
3.70 1.77 0.18 12.30
4.90 0.72 0.07 16.19
188 X 20 X 2.5

2.40 4.55 1.23 6.61


3.0 3.13 0.84 9.98 Tubular Rung:
450
3.70 1.71 0.46 12.29 25x2.0 mm

4.90 0.70 0.19 16.21


2.40 3.82 1.71 6.27
Other dimensions can be
3.0 2.95 1.32 9.99
manufactured and supplied upon request .
Tubular Rung:
600
3.70 1.65 0.74 12.27 30x1.5 mm
Order Example
Width
4.90 0.68 0.30 16.23
)mm(
2.40 3.09 2.14 5.87 Item (h) (w) Type

3.0 2.73 1.89 9.98


750 150 ALT - A4 188 150 C
3.70 1.58 1.09 12.27
4.90 0.66 0.46 16.28 Tubular Rung: 225 ALT - A4 188 225 C
2.40 2.14 2.56 5.21 30x2.0 mm

3.0 2.14 2.56 9.02


900 Order Example:
3.70 1.47 1.76 12.32
ALT - A4 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Side type
4.90 0.63 0.75 16.27
For more ordering details, please check page 136

59
Swaged Tubular Rung
STEEL S235 JRG2
STEEL S235 JRG2
• NEMA Class 8C (149 kg/m by 2.40m)
• NEMA Class 12A (74 kg/m by 3.70m) • NEMA Class 16A (82 kg/m by 4.90m)
• NEMA Class 12B (118 kg/m by 3.70m) • NEMA Class 12A (87 kg/m by 3.70m)
• NEMA Class 12A (74 kg/m by 3.70m) • NEMA Class 12C (150 kg/m by 3.70m)
• NEMA Class 12B (123 kg/m by 3.70m) • NEMA Class D (67 kg/m by 6.0m)

Steel S235 JRG2 - Side Rails

Design Data Classes


Load Classes
Side Height Load Depth Thickness F W I NEMA Side Load Span Classes
Rail Rail NEMA
(mm) Fd (mm) (mm) (mm) cm 3
cm 4
Span Class kg/m (m)
S1 105 75 2.0 22 6.83 35.87 3.70 12A S1 74 3.70 12A
S2 130 100 2.0 22 9.55 62.08 3.70 12B S2 123 3.70 12B
S3 155 125 2.0 22 12.67 98.17 4.90 16A S3 82 4.90 16A
S4 105 75 2.5 22 8.34 43.81 3.70 12A S4 87 3.70 12A
S5 130 100 2.5 22 11.71 76.15 3.70 12C S5 150 3.70 12C
S6 155 125 2.5 22 15.58 120.75 6.0 D S6 67 6.00 D

F
T
Load Depth
Side Height

Tubular Rung

61
Ladder Type Runs | Steel Section

SLT - S1
STEEL LADDER - Swaged Tubular Rung Steel S235 JRG2
NEMA Class 12A Side Rail: S1 | Height: 105 mm |
(74 kg/m by 3.70m) Load Depth: 75 mm |Rung - Spacing: 229 mm

20
Tub 2.0
Ro ular
H und
ed
Ru
ng

W L

Side Height: 105

Load Depth: 75
2.0

Deflection
Width Support Load
NEMA Side Rail
Distance Rung Rail
CLASS S1
Tubular Rung
12A
(mm) (m) KN/m (mm) (mm)

2.40 2.72 0.01 6.32


3.0 1.74 0.01 9.99
150
3.70 0.89 0.00 12.22
4.90 0.35 0.00 16.33
2.40 2.71 0.04 6.34
3.0 1.73 0.02 9.99
225
3.70 0.89 0.01 12.32
4.90 0.34 0.00 16.24
2.40 2.71 0.09 6.41
3.0 1.71 0.06 9.95
300
3.70 0.88 0.03 12.31
4.90 0.33 0.01 16.14
105 X 20 X 2.0

2.40 2.69 0.30 6.61


3.0 1.67 0.19 9.94 Tubular Rung:
450
3.70 0.86 0.10 12.31 25 X 1.5 mm

4.90 0.31 0.03 15.97


2.40 2.68 0.71 7.03
Other dimensions can be
3.0 1.62 0.43 9.99
manufactured and supplied upon request .
600
3.70 0.83 0.22 12.24 Order Example
Width
4.90 0.30 0.08 16.21
)mm(
2.40 2.66 1.38 7.69 Item (h) (w) Type

3.0 1.53 0.79 9.94


750 150 SLT - S1 105 150 C
3.70 0.80 0.41 12.25
4.90 0.28 0.15 16.08 225 SLT - S1 105 225 C
2.40 2.43 2.18 8.00
3.0 1.43 1.28 9.96
900 Order Example:
3.70 0.77 0.69 12.33
SLT - S1 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Side type
4.90 0.26 0.23 15.97
For more ordering details, please check page 136

62
SLT - S2
STEEL LADDER - Swaged Tubular Rung Steel S235 JRG2
NEMA Class 12B Side Rail: S2 | Height: 130 mm |
(123 kg/m by 3.70m) Load Depth: 100 mm |Rung - Spacing: 229 mm

Tub 20
Ro ular 2.0
und
H
ed
Ru
ng

W L

Load Depth: 100


Side Height: 130
2.0

Deflection
Width Support Load
NEMA Side Rail
Distance Rung Rail
CLASS S1
12A Tubular Rung
(mm) (m) KN/m (mm) (mm)

2.40 3.76 0.02 5.05


3.0 2.43 0.01 8.02
150
3.70 1.59 0.01 12.30
4.90 0.64 0.00 16.11
2.40 3.76 0.05 5.09
3.0 2.43 0.03 8.07
225
3.70 1.58 0.02 12.30
4.90 0.64 0.01 16.29
2.40 3.75 0.12 5.16
3.0 2.42 0.08 8.11
300
3.70 1.57 0.05 12.31
4.90 0.63 0.02 16.25
130 X 20 X 2.0

2.40 3.74 0.42 5.46


3.0 2.41 0.27 8.31 Tubular Rung:
450
3.70 1.54 0.17 12.32 25 X 1.5 mm

4.90 0.61 0.07 16.18


2.40 3.72 0.99 6.02
Other dimensions can be
3.0 2.39 0.63 8.66
manufactured and supplied upon request .
600
3.70 1.49 0.40 12.28 Order Example
Width
4.90 0.59 0.16 16.15
)mm(
2.40 3.71 1.92 6.97 Item (h) (w) Type

3.0 2.38 1.23 9.28


750 150 SLT - S2 130 150 C
3.70 1.43 0.74 12.29
4.90 0.57 0.30 16.18 225 SLT - S2 130 225 C
2.40 2.86 2.56 6.51
3.0 2.32 2.08 9.98
900 Order Example:
3.70 1.35 1.21 12.28
SLT - S2 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Side type
4.90 0.55 0.49 16.26
For more ordering details, please check page 136

63
Ladder Type Runs | Steel Section

SLT - S3
STEEL LADDER - Swaged Tubular Rung Steel S235 JRG2
NEMA Class 16A Side Rail: S3 | Height: 155 mm |
(82 kg/m by 4.90m) Load Depth: 125 mm |Rung - Spacing: 229 mm

20
Tub
Ro ular 2.0
H und
ed
Ru
ng

W L

Load Depth: 125


Side Height: 155
2.0

Deflection
Width Support Load
NEMA Side Rail
Distance Rung Rail
CLASS S1
Tubular Rung
12A
(mm) (m) KN/m (mm) (mm)

2.40 4.93 0.02 4.19


3.0 3.21 0.01 6.69
150
3.70 2.12 0.01 10.32
4.90 1.06 0.00 16.33
2.40 4.92 0.07 4.24
3.0 3.20 0.04 6.72
225
3.70 2.11 0.03 10.33
4.90 1.05 0.01 16.31
2.40 4.92 0.16 4.34
3.0 3.19 0.11 6.77
300
3.70 2.11 0.07 10.40
4.90 1.04 0.03 16.29
155 X 20 X 2.0

2.40 4.90 0.55 4.72


3.0 3.18 0.36 7.04 Tubular Rung:
450
3.70 2.09 0.23 10.54 25 X 1.5 mm

4.90 1.02 0.11 16.30


2.40 4.87 1.29 5.45
Other dimensions can be
3.0 3.17 0.84 7.53
manufactured and supplied upon request .
600
3.70 2.08 0.55 70.89 Order Example
Width
4.90 0.99 0.26 16.23
)mm(
2.40 4.10 2.13 5.66 Item (h) (w) Type

3.0 3.15 1.63 8.31


750 150 SLT - S3 155 150 C
3.70 2.07 1.07 11.43
4.90 0.96 0.50 16.25 225 SLT - S3 155 225 C
2.40 2.86 2.56 5.07
3.0 2.86 2.56 8.68
900 Order Example:
3.70 2.05 1.84 12.17
SLT - S3 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Side type
4.90 0.92 0.82 16.21
For more ordering details, please check page 136

64
SLT - S4
STEEL LADDER - Swaged Tubular Rung Steel S235 JRG2
NEMA Class 12A Side Rail: S4 | Height: 105 mm |
(87 kg/m by 3.70m) Load Depth: 75 mm |Rung - Spacing: 229 mm

20
Tub
Ro ular
2.5
und
H ed
Ru
ng

W L

Side Height: 105

Load Depth: 75
2.5

Deflection
Width Support Load
NEMA Side Rail
Distance Rung Rail
CLASS S1
12A Tubular Rung
(mm) (m) KN/m (mm) (mm)

2.40 3.34 0.01 6.33


3.0 2.14 0.01 9.99
150
3.70 1.11 0.00 12.31
4.90 0.44 0.00 16.27
2.40 3.33 0.05 6.35
3.0 2.13 0.03 10.00
225
3.70 1.10 0.02 12.29
4.90 0.43 0.01 16.19
2.40 3.33 0.11 6.43
3.0 2.11 0.07 9.98
300
3.70 1.09 0.04 12.29
4.90 0.42 0.01 16.12
105 X 20 X 2.5

2.40 3.32 0.37 6.70


3.0 2.06 0.23 9.98 Tubular Rung:
450
3.70 1.07 0.12 12.32 25 X 1.5 mm

4.90 0.41 0.05 16.31


2.40 3.30 0.88 7.20
Other dimensions can be
3.0 1.98 0.53 9.98
manufactured and supplied upon request .
600
3.70 1.04 0.28 12.32 Order Example
Width
4.90 0.39 0.10 16.21
)mm(
2.40 3.27 1.70 7.99 Item (h) (w) Type

3.0 1.87 0.97 10.0


750 150 SLT - S4 105 150 C
3.70 1.0 0.52 12.30
4.90 0.37 0.19 16.13 225 SLT - S4 105 225 C
2.40 2.81 2.52 7.99
3.0 1.72 1.54 9.96
900 Order Example:
3.70 0.95 0.85 12.26
SLT - S4 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Side type
4.90 0.35 0.31 16.10
For more ordering details, please check page 136

65
Ladder Type Runs | Steel Section

SLT - S5
STEEL LADDER - Swaged Tubular Rung Steel S235 JRG2
NEMA Class 12C Side Rail: S5 | Height: 130 mm |
(150 kg/m by 3.70m) Load Depth: 100 mm |Rung - Spacing: 229 mm

Tub 20
Ro ular 2.5
und
H
ed
Ru
ng

W L

Load Depth: 100


Side Height: 130
2.5

Deflection
Width Support Load
NEMA Side Rail
Distance Rung Rail
CLASS S1
Tubular Rung
12A
(mm) (m) KN/m (mm) (mm)

2.40 4.64 0.02 5.06


3.0 3.0 0.01 8.03
150
3.70 1.97 0.01 12.33
4.90 0.81 0.00 16.30
2.40 4.63 0.06 5.11
3.0 3.0 0.04 8.08
225
3.70 1.95 0.03 12.28
4.90 0.80 0.01 16.26
2.40 4.63 0.15 5.20
3.0 2.99 0.10 8.13
300
3.70 1.94 0.06 12.30
4.90 0.79 0.03 16.23
130 X 20 X 2.5

2.40 4.61 0.52 5.56


3.0 2.98 0.33 8.38 Tubular Rung:
450
3.70 1.90 0.21 12.29 25 X 1.5 mm

4.90 0.77 0.09 16.20


2.40 4.60 1.22 6.27
Other dimensions can be
3.0 2.96 0.79 8.82
manufactured and supplied upon request .
600
3.70 1.84 0.49 12.30 Order Example
Width
4.90 0.75 0.20 16.22
)mm(
2.40 4.12 2.14 6.69 Item (h) (w) Type

3.0 2.95 1.53 9.58


750 150 SLT - S5 130 150 C
3.70 1.76 0.91 12.33
4.90 0.73 0.38 16.31 225 SLT - S5 130 225 C
2.40 2.86 2.56 5.78
3.0 2.74 2.46 9.99
900 Order Example:
3.70 1.65 1.48 12.32
SLT - S5 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Side type
4.90 0.70 0.63 16.28
For more ordering details, please check page 136

66
SLT - S6
STEEL LADDER - Swaged Tubular Rung Steel S235 JRG2
NEMA Class D Side Rail: S6 | Height: 155 mm |
(67 kg/m by 6.0m) Load Depth: 125 mm |Rung - Spacing: 229 mm

20
Tub
Ro ular 2.5
H
und
ed
Ru
ng

W L

Load Depth: 125


Side Height: 155
2.5

Deflection
Width Support Load
NEMA Side Rail
Distance Rung Rail
CLASS S1
Tubular Rung
12A
(mm) (m) KN/m (mm) (mm)

2.40 6.09 0.03 4.20


3.0 3.97 0.02 6.71
150
3.70 2.62 0.01 10.31
4.90 1.31 0.01 16.23
2.40 6.08 0.09 4.26
3.0 3.96 0.06 6.74
225
3.70 2.61 0.04 10.33
4.90 1.31 0.02 16.33
2.40 6.08 0.20 4.38
3.0 3.95 0.13 6.81
300
3.70 2.60 0.09 10.37
4.90 1.30 0.04 16.32 Tubular Rung:
155 X 20 X 2.5

2.40 6.07 0.68 4.87 25 X 1.5 mm

3.0 3.94 0.44 7.13


450
3.70 2.60 0.29 10.63
4.90 1.27 0.14 16.25
2.40 5.16 1.37 4.95
Other dimensions can be
3.0 3.93 1.04 7.74
manufactured and supplied upon request .
600
3.70 2.58 0.69 11.00 Order Example
Width
4.90 1.24 0.33 16.26
)mm(
2.40 4.13 2.14 5.03 Item (h) (w) Type

3.0 3.91 2.03 8.72


750 150 SLT - S6 155 150 C
3.70 2.57 1.33 11.67
4.90 1.20 0.62 16.26 225 SLT - S6 155 225 C
2.40 3.57 2.57 5.09
3.0 3.57 2.57 8.72 Tubular Rung:
900
25 X 2.0 mm
Order Example:
3.70 2.56 1.84 12.20
SLT - S6 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Side type
4.90 1.17 0.84 16.30
For more ordering details, please check page 136

67
Channel Rung
STEEL S235 JRG2
WELDED C-CHANNEL - LADDER TYPE RUNS

STEEL S235 JRG2


• NEMA Class 8C (149 kg/m by 2.40m)
• NEMA Class 12A (74 kg/m by 3.70m) • NEMA Class 16A (82 kg/m by 4.90m)
• NEMA Class 12B (118 kg/m by 3.70m) • NEMA Class 12A (87 kg/m by 3.70m)
• NEMA Class 12A (74 kg/m by 3.70m) • NEMA Class 12C (150 kg/m by 3.70m)
• NEMA Class 12B (123 kg/m by 3.70m) • NEMA Class D (67 kg/m by 6.0m)

Steel S235 JRG2 - Side Rails

Design Data Classes


Load Classes
Side Height Load Depth Thickness F W I NEMA Side Load Span Classes
Rail Rail NEMA
(mm) Fd (mm) (mm) (mm) cm 3
cm 4
Span Class kg/m (m)
S1 105 75 2.0 22 6.83 35.87 3.70 12A S1 74 3.70 12A
S2 130 100 2.0 22 9.55 62.08 3.70 12B S2 123 3.70 12B
S3 155 125 2.0 22 12.67 98.17 4.90 16A S3 82 4.90 16A
S4 105 75 2.5 22 8.34 43.81 3.70 12A S4 87 3.70 12A
S5 130 100 2.5 22 11.71 76.15 3.70 12C S5 150 3.70 12C
S6 155 125 2.5 22 15.58 120.75 6.0 D S6 67 6.00 D

F
Load Depth
Side Height

C.Channel 21X41

69
Ladder Type Runs | Steel Section

SL - S1
STEEL LADDER - Channel Rung Steel S235 JRG2
NEMA Class 12A Side Rail: S1 | Height: 105 mm |
(74 kg/m by 3.70m) Load Depth: 75 mm |Rung - Spacing: 229 mm

20

Side Height: 105

Load Depth: 75
2.0

Deflection
Width Support Load
NEMA
Distance Rung Rail Side Rail
CLASS C.Channel 21X41
S1
12A
(mm) (m) KN/m (mm) (mm)

2.40 2.69 0.01 6.33


3.0 1.70 0.01 9.96
150
3.70 0.86 0.00 12.28
4.90 0.31 0.00 16.13
2.40 2.69 0.04 6.36
3.0 1.70 0.03 9.98
225
3.70 0.86 0.01 12.29
4.90 0.31 0.00 16.14
2.40 2.69 0.10 6.42
3.0 1.69 0.06 9.96
300
3.70 0.86 0.03 12.31
4.90 0.31 0.01 14.14
105 X 20 X 2.0

2.40 2.69 0.33 6.65


3.0 1.67 0.21 9.99 Rung
450 41 x 21 x 1.5
3.70 0.85 0.1 12.26 mm
4.90 0.31 0.04 26.17
2.40 2.69 0.75 3.10
Other dimensions can be
3.0 1.62 0.47 3.98
manufactured and supplied upon request .
600
3.70 0.84 0.25 12.27 Order Example
Width
4.90 0.31 0.09 16.22
)mm(
2.40 2.69 1.53 7.85 Item (h) (w) Type

3.0 1.54 0.88 9.95


750 150 SL - S1 105 150 C
3.70 0.82 0.47 10.24
4.90 0.31 0.18 10.31 225 SL - S1 105 225 C
2.40 2.39 2.36 7.99
3.0 1.45 1.43 10.00
900 Order Example:
3.70 0.80 0.79 12.30
SLT - S1 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Side type
4.90 0.30 0.30 16.03
For more ordering details, please check page 136

70
SL - S2
STEEL LADDER - Channel Rung Steel S235 JRG2
NEMA Class 12B Side Rail: S2 | Height: 130 mm |
(123 kg/m by 3.70m) Load Depth: 100 mm |Rung - Spacing: 229 mm

20

Load Depth: 100


Side Height: 130
2.0

Deflection
Width Support Load
NEMA
Distance Rung Rail Side Rail
CLASS C.Channel 21X41
S1
12A
(mm) (m) KN/m (mm) (mm)

2.40 3.73 0.02 5.05


3.0 2.40 0.01 8.01
150
3.70 1.55 0.01 12.27
4.90 0.60 0.00 16.00
2.40 3.73 0.06 5.09
3.0 2.40 0.04 8.06
225
3.70 1.55 0.02 12.28
4.90 0.60 0.01 16.01
2.40 3.73 0.14 5.17
3.0 2.40 0.09 8.11
300
3.70 1.55 0.06 12.31
4.90 0.60 0.02 16.02
130 X 20 X 2.0

2.40 3.73 0.46 5.50


3.0 2.40 0.30 8.32 Rung
450 41 x 21 x 1.5
3.70 1.53 0.19 12.30 mm
4.90 0.60 0.07 16.07
2.40 3.73 1.09 6.13
Other dimensions can be
3.0 2.40 0.70 8.73
manufactured and supplied upon request .
600
3.70 1.50 0.44 12.32 Order Example
Width
4.90 0.60 0.18 16.17
)mm(
2.40 3.73 2.13 7.17 Item (h) (w) Type

3.0 2.40 1.37 9.40


750 150 SL - S2 130 150 C
3.70 1.44 0.82 12.26
4.90 0.59 0.34 13.10 225 SL - S2 130 225 C
2.40 3.27 2.56 7.0
3.0 2.30 2.27 9.97
900 Order Example:
3.70 1.36 1.34 12.19
SLT - S2 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Side type
4.90 0.58 0.57 16.11
For more ordering details, please check page 136

71
Ladder Type Runs | Steel Section

SL - S3
STEEL LADDER - Channel Rung Steel S235 JRG2
NEMA Class 16A Side Rail: S3 | Height: 155 mm |
(82 kg/m by 4.90m) Load Depth: 125 mm |Rung - Spacing: 229 mm

20

Load Depth: 125


Side Height: 155
2.0

Deflection
Width Support Load
NEMA
Distance Rung Rail Side Rail
CLASS C.Channel 21X41
S1
12A
(mm) (m) KN/m (mm) (mm)

2.40 4.90 0.02 4.20


3.0 3.18 0.01 6.70
150
3.70 2.09 0.01 10.34
4.90 1.02 0.00 16.24
2.40 4.90 0.08 4.25
3.0 3.18 0.05 6.74
225
3.70 2.09 0.03 10.37
4.90 1.02 0.02 16.27
2.40 4.90 0.18 4.36
3.0 3.18 0.12 6.81 Rung
300 41 x 21 x 1.5
3.70 2.09 0.08 10.41 mm
4.90 1.02 0.04 16.29
2.40 4.90 0.60 4.78
155 X 20 X 2.0

3.0 3.18 0.39 7.08


450
3.70 2.09 0.26 10.59
4.90 1.00 0.12 16.09
2.40 4.90 1.43 5.61
Other dimensions can be
3.0 3.18 0.93 7.62
manufactured and supplied upon request .
600
3.70 2.09 0.61 10.94
4.90 1.0 0.29 16.26
Order Example
2.40 4.90 2.14 6.17 Width
Rung )mm(
3.0 3.18 1.81 8.50 Item (h) (w) Type
750 41 x 41 x 1.5
3.70 2.09 1.19 18.53 mm
150 SL - S3 155 150 C
4.90 0.98 0.56 16.23
Rung
2.40 4.90 0.87 5.05 41 x 41 x 1.5 225 SL - S3 155 225 C
mm
900 3.0 3.18 2.45 9.18
Rung Order Example:
3.70 2.09 1.64 11.97
41 x 212.0 mm SL - S3 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Side type
4.90 0.97 0.76 16.29
For more ordering details, please check page 136

72
SL - S4
STEEL LADDER - Channel Rung Steel S235 JRG2
NEMA Class 12A Side Rail: S4 | Height: 105 mm |
(87 kg/m by 3.70m) Load Depth: 75 mm |Rung - Spacing: 229 mm

20

Side Height: 105

Load Depth: 75
2.5

Deflection
Width Support Load
NEMA
Distance Rung Rail Side Rail
CLASS C.Channel 21X41
S1
12A
(mm) (m) KN/m (mm) (mm)

2.40 3.30 0.02 6.32


3.0 2.10 0.01 9.97
150
3.70 1.07 0.00 12.26
4.90 0.40 0.00 16.11
2.40 3.30 0.05 6.35
3.0 2.10 0.03 9.99
225
3.70 1.07 0.02 12.27
4.90 0.40 0.01 14.11
2.40 3.30 0.12 6.42
3.0 2.09 0.08 9.99
300
3.70 1.07 0.04 12.29
4.90 0.40 0.01 16.12 Rung
41 x 21 x 1.5
2.40 3.30 0.41 6.71 mm
130 X 20 X 2.5

3.0 2.05 0.25 9.98


450
3.70 1.06 0.13 12.28
4.90 0.40 0.05 16.15
2.40 3.22 1.84 7.99
Other dimensions can be
3.0 1.98 0.58 9.99
manufactured and supplied upon request .
600
3.70 1.02 0.58 12.31 Order Example
Width
4.90 0.40 0.23 10.33
)mm(
2.40 3.22 1.84 7.99 Item (h) (w) Type

3.0 1.87 1.07 9.98


750 150 SL - S4 150 150 C
3.70 1.02 0.58 12.31
4.90 0.40 0.23 12.33 225 SL - S4 150 225 C
Rung
2.40 2.95 2.31 7.97 41 x 21 x 2.0
mm Order Example:
900 3.0 1.78 1.40 9.90 SL - S4 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Side type
3.70 1.0 0.99 12.50 For more ordering details, please check page 136
4.90 0.39 0.38 16.17

73
Ladder Type Runs | Steel Section

SL - S5
STEEL LADDER - Channel Rung Steel S235 JRG2
NEMA Class 12C Side Rail: S5 | Height: 130 mm |
(150 kg/m by 3.70m) Load Depth: 100 mm |Rung - Spacing: 229 mm

20

Load Depth: 100


Side Height: 130
2.5

Deflection
Width Support Load
NEMA
Distance Rung Rail Side Rail
CLASS C.Channel 21X41
S1
12A
(mm) (m) KN/m (mm) (mm)

2.40 4.6 0.02 5.07


3.0 2.97 0.01 8.05
150
3.70 1.93 0.01 12.30
4.90 0.77 0.00 16.21
2.40 4.61 0.07 5.12
3.0 2.97 0.05 8.05
225
3.70 1.93 0.03 12.32
4.90 0.77 0.01 16.22
2.40 4.6 0.17 5.22
3.0 2.97 0.11 8.14 Rung
300 41 x 21 x 1.5
3.70 1.92 0.07 12.30 mm
4.90 0.77 0.03 16.23
2.40 4.61 0.57 5.62
130 X 20 X 2.5

3.0 2.97 0.37 8.40


450
3.70 1.89 0.23 12.28
4.90 0.77 0.09 16.30
2.40 4.61 1.35 6.40
Other dimensions can be
3.0 2.97 0.87 8.90
manufactured and supplied upon request .
600
3.70 1.84 0.54 12.29
4.90 0.76 0.22 16.24
Order Example
2.40 4.61 2.09 7.84 Width
Rung )mm(
3.0 2.97 1.69 9.73 Item (h) (w) Type
750 41 x 21 x 2.0
3.70 1.76 1.00 12.27 mm
150 SL - S5 130 150 C
4.90 0.75 0.43 16.26
Rung
2.40 4.61 0.82 5.87 41 x 41 x 1.5 225 SL - S5 130 225 C
mm
900 3.0 2.86 2.24 9.99
Rung Order Example:
3.70 1.66 1.64 12.30 41 x 21 x 2.0
mm SL - S5 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Side type
4.90 0.73 0.72 16.18
For more ordering details, please check page 136

74
SL - S6
STEEL LADDER - Channel Rung Steel S235 JRG2
Side Rail: S6 | Height: 155 mm |
NEMA Class Steel S9 Load Depth: 125 mm |Rung - Spacing: 229 mm

20

Load Depth: 125


Side Height: 155
2.5

C.Channel 21X41

Deflection
Width Support Load
NEMA
Distance Rung Rail Side Rail
CLASS
S1
12A
(mm) (m) KN/m (mm) (mm)

2.40 6.06 0.03 4.21


3.0 3.94 0.02 6.72
150
3.70 2.59 0.01 1.33
4.90 1.28 0.01 16.29
2.40 6.06 0.09 4.28
3.0 3.94 0.06 6.76
225
3.70 2.59 0.04 10.36
4.90 1.28 0.02 16.30 Rung
41 x 21 x 1.5 Rung
2.40 6.06 0.22 4.40 mm 2.40 6.06 1.08 5.26 41 x 41 x 1.5
3.0 3.94 0.14 6.24 mm
300
3.70 2.59 0.09 10.41 Rung
900 3.0 3.94 2.64 9.34 41 x 21 x 2.5
4.90 1.28 0.05 16.33 mm
155 X 20 X 2.5

2.40 6.06 0.75 4.93 3.70 2.47 2.43 12.29


3.0 3.94 0.49 10.8 4.90 1.18 1.16 16.27
450
3.70 2.59 0.32 10.64
4.90 1.27 0.16 16.32 Other dimensions can be
2.40 6.06 1.41 5.59
Rung
41 x 21 x 2.0
manufactured and supplied upon request .
mm
600 Order Example
3.0 3.94 1.15 7.35 Width
3.70 2.59 0.76 11.07 )mm(
Item (h) (w) Type
4.90 1.25 0.37 16.29
Rung 150 SL - S6 155 150 C
2.40 6.06 0.63 4.21 41 x 41 x 1.5
mm
225 SL - S6 155 225 C
Rung
750 3.0 3.94 1.79 8.49 41 x 21 x 2.0
mm
Order Example:
3.70 2.50 1.48 11.80
SL - S6 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Side type
4.90 1.22 0.70 16.27
For more ordering details, please check page 136

75
LADDER TYPE FITTINGS
Ladder Cable Tray fittings are those components which provide changes in direction or elevation of the Ladder
Cable Tray systems, fittings available in both rounded tubes and channel rungs.

SFSP fittings are available in bending radii of 300, 450, 600 and 900 mm to accommodate a wide range of cable
sizes and types.

The horizontal and vertical elbows are available in 450 and 900 of arc.
All illustrations shown herein depict our standard ladder rung.

The rung spacing of ladder fittings is generally maintained at the fitting centerline.

Ladder Cable Tray fittings are usually manufactured in two types: cornered and curved.
Ladder Type Fittings
Bend 45°

2110 2110T 2110R

Bend 90°

2410 2410T 2410R

Tee Branch

2710 2710T 2710S

Horizontal Cross (Intersection)

3010 3010R

77
Ladder Type Fittings
Inside Vertical Elbow (Inside Riser)

3310 3310T 3310R

Outside Vertical Elbow (Outside Riser)

3610 3610T 3610S

Straight Central Reducers

3910R 3910

Right Hand Reducers

4210R 4210

78
Left Hand Reducers

4510R 4510

79
CABLE
TRAYS
SYSTEM
TYPES OVERVIEW AND COMPONENTS
Uni-Metal cable trays and accessories from SFSP are manufactured in compliance with BS EN 61537, 2001/BS
5750/BS EN 10130/BS EN 10131/ BS EN 10051 and NEMA standards. And, as per cabling standards CENELEC EN
50173-1; EIA/ITA 568 A; ISO/IEC 11801; 2002.

We provide a wide range of products capable of providing the characteristics which respond to the proposed ap-
plication, along with quality of assembly, speed of installation, and cost-saving cable trays.

Materials

Pre-Galvanized, Hot-Dip Galvanized, Stainless Steel and Aluminium

Material Thickness

mm 1.20 mm 1.50 mm 2.00 mm 1.00

Light Duty - Cable Tray System Medium Duty - Cable Tray System

LCT - 100 MCT - 120

Thickness : 1.00 mm Thickness : 1.20 mm


Side Height : 25 and 50 mm Side Height : 25 ,50 ,75 and 100 mm
Length : 2440 mm / 3000 mm Length : 2440 mm / 3000 mm
Width : 50 - 1000 mm Width : 50 - 1000 mm

Heavy Duty - Cable Tray System Very Heavy Duty - Cable Tray System

HCT - 150 VCT - 200

Thickness : 1.50 mm Thickness : 2.00 mm


Side Height : 25 ,50 ,75 and 100 mm Side Height : 25 ,50 ,75 and 100 mm
Length : 2440 mm / 3000 mm Length : 2440 mm / 3000 mm
Width : 50 - 1000 mm Width : 50 - 1000 mm

All illustrations, drawings and descriptive material in this publication are of a generally informative nature only, and do not form a complete package
. of the specifications or description of the goods
. Most of the dimensions shown are nominal
. Uni-Metal can make modifications and design, materials or finishes as it deems necessary or desirable

82
Types of Side Heights

Straight STR

Return Flange Inside RFI

Return Flange Outside RFO

C-Type Inside CTI

C-Type Outside CTO

Shapes of Accessories

Cornered Curved

Types of Perforation

Staggered Serial

Dimensions

15

W
Oblong holes
7 x 32

83
25
25
CABLE TRAY RUNS

84
Cable Tray Runs

LCT - 25
Light Duty -1.00 mm Thickness Thickness : 1.00 mm
Side Height : 25 mm
(Side Height 25 mm) Length : 2440 mm / 3000 mm
Width : 50 - 300 mm

Cable tray Support distance (m) Load kN/m

LCT 50 - 25 1.00 0.65


width (w) : 50 mm 1.20 0.37
1.50 0.18
2.00 0.07
LCT 100 -25 1.00 0.75
width (w) : 100 mm 1.20 0.46
1.50 0.23
2.00 0.09
LCT 150 -25 1.00 0.68
width (w) : 150 mm 1.20 0.51
1.50 0.25
2.00 0.09
LCT 200 -25 1.00 0.68
width (w) : 200 mm 1.20 0.47 L

1.50 0.26
2.00 0.10
LCT 225 -25 1.00 0.52
25
width (w) : 225 mm 1.20 0.36
1.50 0.22 W
2.00 0.10
LCT 300 -25 1.00 0.27
width (w) : 300 mm 1.20 0.18
1.50 0.10
2.00 0.04

50

32
7

Order Example
Width
)mm(
Item (h) (w) (t) Type

50 LCT25 025 0050 1 RFI

100 LCT25 025 0100 1 RFI

Order Example:
LCT25 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Thickness - Side type
For more ordering details, please check page 100

85
Cable Tray Runs

LCT - 50
Light Duty -1.00 mm Thickness Thickness : 1.00 mm
Side Height : 50 mm
(Side Height 50 mm) Length : 2440 mm / 3000 mm
Width : 50 - 450 mm

Cable tray Support distance (m) Load kN/m

LCT 50 -50 1.00 1.92


width (w) : 50 mm 1.20 1.33
1.50 0.84
2.00 0.40
LCT 100 -50 1.00 2.10
width (w) : 100 mm 1.20 1.45
1.50 0.92
2.00 0.50
LCT 150 -50 1.00 2.19
width (w) : 150 mm 1.20 1.50
1.50 0.96
2.00 0.53
LCT 200 -50 1.00 1.73
width (w) : 200 mm 1.20 1.48 L
1.50 0.94
2.00 0.52
LCT 225 -50 1.00 1.52
width (w) : 225 mm 1.20 1.13 50

1.50 0.72
W
2.00 0.39
LCT 300 -50 1.00 0.87
width (w) : 300 mm 1.20 0.59
1.50 0.37
25
2.00 0.19
LCT 400 -50 1.00 0.45 25

width (w) : 400 mm 1.20 0.30


1.50 0.18 25 25

2.00 0.08
32
LCT 450 -50 1.00 0.34 7

width (w) : 450 mm 1.20 0.22


1.50 0.13
2.00 0.05

Order Example
Width
)mm(
Item (h) (w) (t) Type

50 LCT50 050 0050 1 RFI

100 LCT50 050 0100 1 RFI

Order Example:
LCT50 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Thickness - Side type
For more ordering details, please check page 100

86
MCT - 25
Medium Duty - 1.20 mm Thickness Thickness : 1.20 mm
Side Height : 25 mm
(Side Height 25 mm) Length : 2440 mm / 3000 mm
Width : 50 - 450 mm

Cable tray Support distance (m) Load kN/m

MCT 50 - 25 1.00 0.77


width (w) : 50 mm 1.20 0.44
1.50 0.22
2.00 0.08
MCT 100 - 25 1.00 0.90
width (w) : 100 mm 1.20 0.55
1.50 0.27
2.00 0.10
MCT 150 - 25 1.00 0.92
Width (w) : 150 mm 1.20 0.61
1.50 0.30
2.00 0.11
MCT 200 - 25 1.00 0.93
width (w) : 200 1.20 0.64 L
1.50 0.32
2.00 0.12
CT 220 - 25 1.00 0.93
width (w) : 225 1.20 0.64 25

1.50 0.32
W
2.00 0.12
MCT 300 - 25 1.00 0.48
width (w) : 300 1.20 0.32
1.50 0.19
2.00 0.09
MCT 400 - 25 1.00 0.24
width (w) : 400 1.20 0.15
50
1.50 0.08
32
2.00 …. 7

MCT 450 - 25 1.00 0.17


width (w) : 450 1.20 0.11
1.50 ….
2.00 ….

Order Example
Width
)mm(
Item (h) (w) (t) Type

50 MCT25 025 0050 2 RFI

100 MCT25 025 0100 2 RFI

Order Example:
MCT25 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Thickness - Side type
For more ordering details, please check page 100

87
Cable Tray Runs

MCT - 50
Medium Duty - 1.20 mm Thickness Thickness : 1.20 mm
Side Height : 50 mm
(Side Height 50 mm) Length : 2440 mm / 3000 mm
Width : 50 - 450 mm

Cable tray Support distance (m) Load kN/m

MCT 50 - 50 1.00 2.29


width (w) : 50 mm 1.20 1.59
1.50 1.01
2.00 0.48
MCT 100 - 50 1.00 2.51
width (w) : 100 mm 1.20 1.74
1.50 1.10
2.00 0.60
MCT 150 - 50 1.00 2.62
width (w) : 150 mm 1.20 1.80
1.50 1.15
2.00 0.63
MCT 200 - 50 1.00 2.48
width (w) : 200 1.20 1.85 L

1.50 1.17
2.00 0.65
MCT 225 - 50 1.00 2.20
width (w) : 225 1.20 1.85 50
1.50 1.18
2.00 0.65 W

MCT 300 - 50 1.00 1.52


width (w) : 300 1.20 1.04
1.50 0.65
2.00 0.35
25
MCT 400 - 50 1.00 0.80
width (w) : 400 1.20 0.54 25

1.50 0.33
2.00 0.16 25 25
MCT 450 - 50 1.00 0.61
width (w) : 450 1.20 0.41 32
7
1.50 0.24
2.00 0.11

Order Example
Width
)mm(
Item (h) (w) (t) Type

50 MCT50 050 0050 2 RFI

100 MCT50 050 0100 2 RFI

Order Example:
MCT50 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Thickness - Side type
For more ordering details, please check page 100

88
MCT - 75
Medium Duty - 1.20 mm Thickness Thickness : 1.20 mm
Side Height : 75 mm
(Side Height 75 mm) Length : 2440 mm / 3000 mm
Width : 100 - 450 mm

Cable tray Support distance (m) Load kN/m

MCT 100 - 75 1.00 4.45


width (w) : 100 mm 1.20 3.26
1.50 2.08
2.00 1.16
MCT 150 - 75 1.00 4.53
width (w) : 150 mm 1.20 3.32
1.50 2.19
2.00 1.22
MCT 200 - 75 1.00 2.48
width (w) : 200 1.20 2.48
1.50 2.26
2.00 1.25
MCT 225 - 75 1.00 2.20
width (w) : 225 1.20 2.20 L
1.50 2.20
2.00 1.27
MCT 300 - 75 1.00 1.63
width (w) : 300 1.20 1.63 75
1.50 1.37
2.00 0.75 W

MCT 400 - 75 1.00 1.21


width (w) : 400 1.20 1.14
1.50 0.71
2.00 0.38
25
MCT 450 - 75 1.00 1.06
25
width (w) : 450 1.20 0.87
1.50 0.54
25 25
2.00 0.28

32
7

Order Example
Width
)mm(
Item (h) (w) (t) Type

50 MCT75 075 0100 2 RFI

100 MCT75 075 0150 2 RFI

Order Example:
MCT75 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Thickness - Side type
For more ordering details, please check page 100

89
Cable Tray Runs

MCT - 100
Medium Duty - 1.20 mm Thickness Thickness : 1.20 mm
Side Height : 100 mm
(Side Height 50 mm) Length : 2440 mm / 3000 mm
Width : 100 - 450 mm

Cable tray Support distance (m) Load kN/m

MCT 100 - 100 1.00 5.00


width (w) : 100 mm 1.20 4.86
1.50 3.30
2.00 1.84
MCT 150 - 100 1.00 3.32
width (w) : 150 mm 1.20 3.32
1.50 3.03
2.00 1.95
MCT 200 - 100 1.00 2.47
width (w) : 200 mm 1.20 2.47
1.50 2.47
2.00 2.02
MCT 225 - 100 1.00 2.19
width (w) : 225 mm 1.20 2.19 L

1.50 2.19
2.00 2.05
MCT 300 - 100 1.00 1.63
width (w) : 300 mm 1.20 1.63 100
1.50 1.63
2.00 1.30 W

MCT 400 - 100 1.00 1.20


width (w) : 400 mm 1.20 1.20
1.50 1.20
25
2.00 0.67 25

MCT 450 - 100 1.00 1.06


width (w) : 450 mm 1.20 1.06 25 25

1.50 0.94 32
7
2.00 0.50

Order Example
Width
)mm(
Item (h) (w) (t) Type

100 MCT100 0100 0100 2 RFI

150 MCT150 0100 0150 2 RFI

Order Example:
MCT100 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Thickness - Side type
For more ordering details, please check page 100

90
HCT - 25
Heavy Duty - 1.50 mm Thickness Thickness : 1.50mm
Side Height : 25 mm
(Side Height 25 mm) Length : 2440 mm / 3000 mm
Width : 100 - 600 mm

Cable tray Support distance (m) Load kN/m

HCT 50 - 25 1.00 0.95


width (w) : 50 mm 1.20 0.54
1.50 0.27
2.00 0.10
HCT 100 - 25 1.00 1.11
width (w) : 100 mm 1.20 0.68
1.50 0.34
2.00 0.13
HCT 150 - 25 1.00 1.13
width (w) : 150 mm 1.20 0.75
1.50 0.37
2.00 0.14
HCT 200 - 25 1.00 1.15
width (w) : 200 1.20 0.78 L
1.50 0.39
2.00 0.14
HCT 225 - 25 1.00 1.15
width (w) : 225 1.20 0.79 25
1.50 0.40
W
2.00 0.15
HCT 300 - 25 1.00 0.95
width (w) : 300 1.20 0.65
1.50 0.40
2.00 0.14
HCT 400 - 25 1.00 0.49
width (w) : 400 1.20 0.33
50
1.50 0.18
2.00 0.08 32
7
HCT 450 - 25 1.00 0.37
width (w) : 450 1.20 0.24
1.50 0.13
2.00 0.05
HCT 500 - 25 1.00 0.28
width (w) : 500 1.20 0.18
1.50 0.09 Order Example
Width
2.00 ….
)mm(
HCT 600 - 25 1.00 0.16 Item (h) (w) (t) Type

width (w) : 600 1.20 0.09


100 HCT25 025 0100 3 RFI
1.50 ….
2.00 …. 150 HCT25 025 0150 3 RFI

Order Example:
HCT25 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Thickness - Side type
For more ordering details, please check page 100

91
Cable Tray Runs

HCT - 50
Heavy Duty - 1.50 mm Thickness Thickness : 1.50mm
Side Height : 50 mm
(Side Height 50 mm) Length : 2440 mm / 3000 mm
Width : 50 - 900 mm

Cable tray Support distance (m) Load kN/m

HCT 50 - 50 1.00 2.85


width (w) : 50 mm 1.20 1.97
1.50 1.25
2.00 0.60
HCT 100 - 50 1.00 3.12
width (w) : 100 mm 1.20 2.16
1.50 1.37
2.00 0.76
HCT 150 - 50 1.00 3.25
width (w) : 150 mm 1.20 2.25
1.50 1.43
2.00 0.78
HCT 200 - 50 1.00 3.30
width (w) : 200 1.20 2.30 L
1.50 1.45
2.00 0.80
HCT 225 - 50 1.00 3.33
width (w) : 225 1.20 2.32 50
1.50 1.47
2.00 0.80 W

HCT 300 - 50 1.00 2.57


width (w) : 300 1.20 2.06
1.50 1.30
2.00 0.70
25 HCT 750 - 50 1.00 0.35
HCT 400 - 50 1.00 1.60
25
width (w) : 750 1.20 0.22
width (w) : 400 1.20 1.05
1.50 0.10
1.50 0.65
2.00 x
2.00 0.35 25 25
HCT 900 - 50 1.00 0.20
HCT 450 - 50 1.00 1.23
width (w) : 900 1.20 0.10
width (w) : 450 1.20 0.83 32
7
1.50 0.03
1.50 0.50
2.00 x
2.00 0.25
HCT 500 - 50 1.00 0.95
width (w) : 500 1.20 0.65
1.50 0.35 Order Example
Width
2.00 0.19
)mm(
HCT 600 - 50 1.00 0.63 Item (h) (w) (t) Type

width (w) : 600 1.20 0.41


50 HCT50 050 0050 3 RFI
1.50 0.24
2.00 0.10 100 HCT50 050 0100 3 RFI
HCT 700 - 50 1.00 0.43
width (w) : 700 1.20 0.27
1.50 0.14
Order Example:
2.00 x HCT50 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Thickness - Side type
For more ordering details, please check page 100

92
HCT - 75
Heavy Duty - 1.50 mm Thickness Thickness : 1.50 mm
Side Height : 75 mm
(Side Height 75 mm) Length : 2440 mm / 3000 mm
Width : 100 - 700 mm

Cable tray Support distance (m) Load kN/m

HCT 100 -75 1.00 5.50


width (w) : 100 mm 1.20 4.05
1.50 2.55
2.00 1.42
HCT 150 -75 1.00 5.20
width (w) : 150 mm 1.20 4.20
1.50 2.70
2.00 1.50
HCT 200 -75 1.00 3.89
width (w) : 200 mm 1.20 3.89
1.50 2.80
2.00 1.56
HCT 225 -75 1.00 3.45
width (w) : 225 mm 1.20 3.45 L
1.50 2.85
2.00 1.58
HCT 300 -75 1.00 2.57
width (w) : 300 mm 1.20 2.57 75
1.50 2.57
2.00 1.49 W

HCT 400 -75 1.00 1.90


width (w) : 400 mm 1.20 1.90
1.50 1.43
2.00 0.77
25
HCT 450 -75 1.00 1.68
width (w) : 450 mm 1.20 1.68 25

1.50 1.08
2.00 0.58 25 25

HCT 500 -75 1.00 1.50


width (w) : 500 mm 1.20 1.38 32
7
1.50 0.86
2.00 0.45
HCT 600 -75 1.00 1.22
width 600 mm 1.20 0.90
1.50 0.55 Order Example
Width
2.00 0.27
)mm(
HCT 700 -75 1.00 0.94 Item (h) (w) (t) Type

width 700 mm 1.20 0.63


100 HCT75 075 0100 3 RFI
1.50 0.37
2.00 0.16 150 HCT75 075 0150 3 RFI

Order Example:
HCT75 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Thickness - Side type
For more ordering details, please check page 100

93
Cable Tray Runs

HCT - 100
Heavy Duty - 1.50 mm Thickness Thickness : 1.50 mm
Side Height : 100 mm
(Side Height 100 mm) Length : 2440 mm / 3000 mm
Width : 100 - 700 mm

Cable tray Support distance (m) Load kN/m

HCT 100 - 100 1.00 7.82


width (w) : 100 mm 1.20 6.07
1.50 4.10
2.00 2.30
HCT 150 - 100 1.00 5.19
width (w) : 150 mm 1.20 5.19
1.50 4.35
2.00 2.42
HCT 200 - 100 1.00 3.88
width (w) : 200 mm 1.20 3.88
1.50 3.88
2.00 2.52
HCT 225 - 100 1.00 3.44
width (w) : 225 mm 1.20 3.44 L

1.50 3.44
2.00 2.56
HCT 300 - 100 1.00 2.56
width (w) : 300 mm 1.20 2.56 100

1.50 2.56
W
2.00 2.56
HCT 400 - 100 1.00 1.89
width (w) : 400 mm 1.20 1.89
1.50 1.89 25
25
2.00 1.35
HCT 450 - 100 1.00 1.67 25 25

width (w) : 450 mm 1.20 1.67 32


7
1.50 1.67
2.00 1.00
2.50 0.63
HCT 500 - 100 1.00 1.49
width (w) : 500 mm 1.20 1.49
1.50 1.49
2.00 0.80
HCT 600 - 100 1.00 1.22
width 600 mm 1.20 1.22 Order Example
Width
1.50 0.98 )mm(
Item (h) (w) (t) Type
2.00 0.50
HCT 700 - 100 1.00 1.02 100 HCT100 0100 0100 3 RFI

width 700 mm 1.20 1.02


150 HCT100 0100 0150 3 RFI
1.50 0.67
2.00 0.33

Order Example:
HCT100 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Thickness - Side type
For more ordering details, please check page 100

94
VCT - 25
Very Heavy Duty -2.00 mm Thickness Thickness : 2.0 mm
Side Height : 25 mm
(Side Height 25 mm) Length : 2440 mm / 3000 mm
Width : 50 - 450 mm

Cable tray Support distance (m) Load kN/m

VCT 50 - 25 1.00 1.23


width (w) : 50 mm 1.20 0.70
1.50 0.35
2.00 0.14
VCT 100 - 25 1.00 1.45
width (w) : 100 mm 1.20 0.88
1.50 0.42
2.00 0.17
VCT 150 - 25 1.00 1.48
width (w) : 150 mm 1.20 0.98
1.50 0.48
2.00 0.18
VCT 200 - 25 1.00 1.50
width (w) : 200 1.20 1.03 L
1.50 0.50
2.00 0.18
VCT 225 - 25 1.00 1.50
width (w) : 225 1.20 1.03 25
1.50 0.52
W
2.00 0.18
VCT 300 - 25 1.00 1.52
width (w) : 300 1.20 1.04
1.50 0.53
2.00 0.18
VCT 400 - 25 1.00 1.20
width (w) : 400 1.20 0.82
1.50 0.50 50

2.00 0.18 32
7
VCT 450 - 25 1.00 0.92
width (w) : 450 1.20 0.62
1.50 0.37
2.00 0.18

Order Example
Width
)mm(
Item (h) (w) (t) Type

50 VCT25 025 0050 4 RFI

100 VCT25 025 0100 4 RFI

Order Example:
VCT25 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Thickness - Side type
For more ordering details, please check page 100

95
Cable Tray Runs

VCT - 50
Very Heavy Duty -2.00 mm Thickness Thickness : 2.0 mm
Side Height : 50 mm
(Side Height 50 mm) Length : 2440 mm / 3000 mm
Width : 50 - 1000 mm

Cable tray Support distance (m) Load kN/m

VCT 50 - 50 1.00 3.77


width (w) : 50 mm 1.20 2.60
1.50 1.65
2.00 0.78
VCT 100 - 50 1.00 4.13
width (w) : 100 mm 1.20 2.86
1.50 1.83
2.00 1.00
VCT 150 - 50 1.00 4.30
width (w) : 150 mm 1.20 2.98
1.50 1.88
2.00 1.05
VCT 200 - 50 1.00 4.40
width (w) : 200 1.20 3.05 L

1.50 1.92
2.00 1.07
VCT 225 - 50 1.00 4.43
width (w) : 225 1.20 3.06 50
1.50 1.95
2.00 1.07 W
VCT 300 - 50 1.00 4.47
width (w) : 300 1.20 3.12
1.50 1.97 VCT 800 - 50 1.00 0.80
2.00 1.08 width (w) : 800 1.20 0.50
VCT 400 - 50 1.00 3.42 25
1.50 0.28
width (w) : 400 1.20 2.64 25 2.00 0.10
1.50 1.66 VCT 900 - 50 1.00 0.58
2.00 0.90 width (w) :25
900 25 1.20 0.36
VCT 450 - 50 1.00 2.97 1.50 0.18
width (w) : 450 1.20 2.04 2.00 X
32
7
1.50 1.27 VCT 1000 - 50 1.00 0.43
2.00 0.68 width (w) : 1000 1.20 0.25
VCT 500 - 50 1.00 2.36 1.50 0.10
width (w) : 500 1.20 1.60 2.00 X
1.50 1.00
2.00 0.50 Order Example
Width
VCT 600 - 50 1.00 1.57
)mm(
width (w) : 600 1.20 1.06 Item (h) (w) (t) Type

1.50 0.64
50 VCT50 050 0050 4 RFI
2.00 0.32
VCT 700 - 50 1.00 1.10 100 VCT50 050 0100 4 RFI
width (w) : 700 1.20 0.72
1.50 0.42
Order Example:
2.00 0.19 VCT50 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Thickness - Side type
For more ordering details, please check page 100

96
VCT - 75
Very Heavy Duty -2.00 mm Thickness Thickness : 2.0 mm
Side Height : 75 mm
(Side Height 75 mm) Length : 2440 mm / 3000 mm
Width : 100 - 1000 mm

Cable tray Support distance (m) Load kN/m

VCT 100 - 75 1.00 7.31


width (w) : 100 mm 1.20 5.39
1.50 3.44
2.00 1.92
VCT 150 - 75 1.00 7.52
width (w) : 150 mm 1.20 5.62
1.50 3.62
2.00 2.02
VCT 200 - 75 1.00 6.92
width (w) : 200 1.20 5.72
1.50 3.73
2.00 2.07
VCT 300 - 75 1.00 4.58
width (w) : 300 1.20 4.58 L

1.50 3.86
2.00 2.13
VCT 400 - 75 1.00 3.40
width (w) : 400 1.20 3.40 75
1.50 3.40
2.00 1.90 W
VCT 450 - 75 1.00 3.00
width (w) : 450 1.20 3.00

1.50 2.65
2.00 1.45
25
VCT 500 - 75 1.00 2.70 VCT 900 - 75 1.00 1.30
width (w) : 500 1.20 2.70 25 width (w) : 900 1.20 0.86
1.50 2.10 1.50 0.50
2.00 1.13 25 25 2.00 0.21
VCT 600 - 75 1.00 2.22 VCT 1000 - 75 1.00 1.01
width (w) : 600 1.20 2.22 width (w) : 1000 32 1.20 0.65
7
1.50 1.38 1.50 0.36
2.00 0.73 2.00 0.13
VCT 700 - 75 1.00 1.87
width (w) : 700 1.20 1.58
1.50 0.95
2.00 0.49 Order Example
Width
VCT 800 - 75 1.00 1.60
)mm(
Item (h) (w) (t) Type
width (w) : 800 1.20 1.15

1.50 0.68 50 VCT75 075 0050 4 RFI


2.00 0.33
100 VCT75 075 0100 4 RFI

Order Example:
VCT75 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Thickness - Side type
For more ordering details, please check page 100

97
Cable Tray Runs

VCT - 100
Very Heavy Duty -2.00 mm Thickness Thickness : 2.00 mm
Side Height : 100 mm
(Side Height 50 mm) Length : 2440 mm / 3000 mm
Width : 100 - 1000 mm

Cable tray Support distance (m) Load kN/m

VCT 100 - 100 1.00 10.65


width (w) : 100 mm 1.20 8.07
1.50 5.46
2.00 3.05
VCT 150 - 100 1.00 9.25
width (w) : 150 mm 1.20 8.34
1.50 5.78
2.00 3.23
VCT 200 - 100 1.00 6.92
width (w) : 200 1.20 6.92
1.50 5.95
2.00 3.35
VCT 300 - 100 1.00 4.58
width (w) : 300 1.20 4.58 L

1.50 4.58
2.00 3.48
VCT 400 - 100 1.00 3.40
width (w) : 400 1.20 3.40
100
1.50 3.40
2.00 3.25 W

VCT 500 - 100 1.00 2.69


width (w) : 500 1.20 2.69
1.50 2.69
25
2.00 1.98 25
VCT 600 - 100 1.00 2.20
width (w) : 600 1.20 2.20 25 25

1.50 2.20 32
7
2.00 1.30
VCT 700 - 100 1.00 1.86
width (w) : 700 1.20 1.86
1.50 1.70
2.00 0.90
VCT 800 - 100 1.00 1.60
width (w) : 800 1.20 1.60
1.50 1.23
2.00 0.63 Order Example
Width
VCT 900 - 100 1.00 1.39
)mm(
width (w) : 900 1.20 1.39 Item (h) (w) (t) Type

1.50 0.92
100 VCT100 0100 0050 4 RFI
2.00 0.45
VCT 1000 - 100 1.00 1.79 150 VCT100 0100 0100 4 RFI
width (w) : 1000 1.20 1.18
1.50 0.70
Order Example:
2.00 0.32 VCT100 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Thickness - Side type
For more ordering details, please check page 100

98
CABLE TRAY FITTINGS
Cable Tray Fittings
Bend 45°- cornered / 160 - 161

160 161

Order Example:
160 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Thickness - Side type
For more ordering details, please check page 100

Bend 45°- curved / 170 - 171

171

Radius
r = 200 mm

Order Example
Width
)mm(
Item (h) (w) (t) Type Order Example:
170 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Thickness - Side type
50 170 050 0050 2 RFI For more ordering details, please check page 100

100 171 050 0100 2 RFI

100
Bend 90°- cornered / 240 - 241 - 242

240 241

242

Order Example
Width
)mm(
Item (h) (w) (t) Type Order Example:
240 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Thickness - Side type
50 240 050 0050 2 RFI For more ordering details, please check page 100

100 241 050 0100 2 RFI

101
Cable Tray Fittings
Bend 90°- curved / 250 - 251

250 251

Order Example
Order Example:
Width 250 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Thickness - Side type
)mm(
Item (h) (w) (t) Type For more ordering details, please check page 100

50 250 050 0050 2 RFI

100 250 050 0100 2 RFI

Radius
r = 200 mm

Cornered/Short

250T 251T

For this type, all specifications are the same as other bend 90o types.
Order No. shall be the same as curved type,but add the letter T .
ex: 250 050 0050 2 ; Curved type
250T 050 0050 2 ; Cornered/Short type

102
Tee Branch - cornered / 320 - 321 - 322

320 321

322

Order Example
Width
)mm(
Item (h) (w) (t) Type Order Example:
320 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Thickness - Side type
50 320 050 0050 2 RFI For more ordering details, please check page 100

100 321 050 0100 2 RFI

Tee Branch - curved / 330 - 331

330 331

Order Example
Width Order Example:
)mm(
Item (h) (w) (t) Type
330 - Side height (h)
- Width(w) - Thickness -
Radius
50 330 050 0050 2 RFI Side type r = 200 mm
For more ordering details,
100 330 050 0100 2 RFI please check page 100

103
Cable Tray Fittings
Intersection - cornered / 400 - 401

400 401

Order Example
Width
)mm(
Item (h) (w) (t) Type

50 400 050 0050 2 RFI

100 401 050 0100 2 RFI

Order Example:
400 - Side height (h) - Width(w) - Thickness - Side type
For more ordering details, please check page 100

Intersection - curved / 410 - 411

401 410

Order Example
Width Order Example:
)mm(
Item (h) (w) (t) Type
410 - Side height (h)
- Width(w) - Thickness -
Radius
50 410 050 0050 2 RFI Side type r = 200 mm
For more ordering details,
100 410 050 0100 2 RFI please check page 100

104
Vertical 90o (outside riser) - cornered / 480 - 481 - 482 

480 481 482

Vertical 90o (outside riser) - curved / 490

Order Example
Width Order Example:
)mm(
Item (h) (w) (t) Type
490 - Side height (h)
- Width(w) - Thickness -
Radius
50 490 050 0050 2 RFI Side type r = 200 mm
For more ordering details,
100 490 050 0100 2 RFI please check page 100

105
Cable Tray Fittings
Adjustable riser / 640

Order Example
Width Order Example:
)mm(
Item (h) (w) (t) Type (L) (r)
640 - Side height (h) - Width (w) -
Thickness (t) - Side type - Length (L) -
50 640 050 0050 2 RFI 3000 /45 Angle (r)
For more ordering details, please check
100 640 050 0100 2 RFI 3000 /45 page 100

Custom risers
For inquiries, use same code as adjustable risers and add the angle desired at the end, ex:

for custom riser 45° angle


• 640 050 0300 4 STR 3000/45

for custom riser 60° angle


• 660 050 0300 4 STR 3000/60

Custom risers are suitable for 45° and 60° angles

106
Reducer - central / 680-681

680 681

W2
Order Example
Width
)mm(
Item (h) (w) (t) Type

50 682 050 0300 2 RFI

100 681 050 0400 2 RFI

h Order Example:
W1 680 - Side height (h) - Width (w1) - Width (w2) -
Thickness (t) - Side type
for more ordering details, please check pages (61-62)

107
Cable Tray Fittings
Right side / 690 - 691

690 691

Order Example
Width
)mm(
Item (h) (w1) (w2) (t) Type Order Example:
690 - Side height (h) - Width (w) - Thickness (t) - Side type
50 690 050 0300 050 2 RFI For more ordering details, please check page 100

100 691 050 0400 050 2 RFI

Left side / 700 - 701

700 701

Order Example
Width
)mm(
Item (h) (w1) (w2) (t) Type Order Example:
700 - Side height (h) - Width (w) - Thickness (t) - Side type
50 700 050 0300 050 2 RFI For more ordering details, please check page 100

100 701 050 0400 050 2 RFI

108
Add - on branch / cornered / 800

800

Order Example
Width
)mm( Order Example:
Item (h) (w) (t) Type
800 - Side height (h) - Width (w) - Thickness (t) - Side type
for more ordering details, please check pages (61-62)
50 800 050 0050 2 RFI

100 800 050 0100 2 RFI

Add - on branch / curved /810

810

Order Example
Width Order Example:
)mm(
Item (h) (w) (t) Type
810 - Side height (h)
- Width(w) - Thickness -
Radius
50 810 050 0500 2 RFI Side type r = 200 mm
For more ordering details,
100 810 050 0100 2 RFI please check page 100

109
This Master catalogue is designed to be helpful to engineers and contractors in the
application and selection of Cable Management Systems products for construction
and maintenance.
If a unique application requires a special product not included in this catalogue , SFSP
engineering personnel are ready to furnish design consultation and realistic cost
estimates.
CABLE
TRUNKINGS
SYSTEM
TECHNICAL DATA

Specifications and Installation Guide

To comply with wiring regulations, the installer shall ensure that the trunking is not overfilled and
acceptable pressure is applied to the cables. In order to do this, the installer shall not exceed the 45%
space factor given in the rigs. The 45% space factor means that the total cross-sectional area of all
cables shall not be greater than 45% of the cross-sectional area of the trunking.

Choosing Correct Trunking Dimensions Cable sizes and factors


Trunking sizes and capacity
factors
For each cable being used, obtain the appropriate factor Size (mm2) Common Trunking
Size (mm)
from ‘ cable sizes and factors ’ table. Sum all these cable (nom.) cable factor capacity factor
factors and compare the result to the ‘ trunking sizes and Solid 50 x 50 1 037
capacity factor ’ table. The minimum size of trunking that 1·5 8·0 75 x 50 1 555
can be used is that size having a factor equal to, or greater
2·5 11·9 75 x 75 2 371
than the sum of all trunking capacity factors.
Stranded 100 x 50 2 091

Example: 1·5 8·6 100 x 75 3 189


- Type of cables = stranded 2·5 12·6 100 x 100 4 252
Cable size (cross–sectional area) = 25 mm2 4·0 16·6 150 x 50 3 091
Number of cables= 20 6·0 21·2 150 x 75 4 742
Common cable factor = 73.9 (cable sizes and factors table)
10·0 35·3 150 x 100 6 394
16·0 47·8 150 x 150 9 697
- Type of cables = solid
Cable size (cross–sectional area) = 2.5 mm2 25·0 73·9 225 x 75 7 114
Number of cables = 15 35·0 93·3 225 x 100 9 298
Common cable factor = 11.9 (cable sizes and factors table) 50·0 128·7 225 x 150 14 652
70·0 167·4 225 x 225 21 766
95·0 229·7 300 x 75 9 486
120·0 277·6 300 x 100 12 788
150·0 343·1 300 x 150 19 447
240·0 552·0 300 x 300 38 000

Number of cables x cable factor = Capacity factor

Stranded : 20 x 73.9 = 1478.0


Solid : 15 x 11.9 = 178.5

Total ( Stranded + Solid ) = 1656.5

Choose trunking size 75 x 75 = trunking capacity 2371 > 1656.5 or trunking size 100 x 50 = trunking capacity
2091 > 1656.5
Check trunking sizes and capacity factor table.

112
TRUNKING RUNS

Single compartment return edge cable trunking is manufactured with various thicknesses 0.9 mm, 1.2 mm, 1.4
mm, 1.6 mm, 1.8 mm and 2.0 mm in compliance with BS 4678-1 was replaced by BS EN 50085-1 :2005 and BS EN
50085-2 :2006. It comes with all standard trunking couplings and lids that quickly lock into place.

Single Compartment Cable Trunking


Thickness: 0.9 mm - 1.2 mm
Available trunkings’ lengths are:
- 2440 mm / 3000 mm

SCT - 4200

Reference Dimensions

0.9 mm 1.2 mm mm inch

SCT 4200 050 0050 2 SCT 4300 050 0050 3 50 x 50 mm (2”x2”)


Type 1: inside Type 2: outside
SCT 4200 075 0050 2 SCT 4300 075 0050 3 75 x 50 mm (3”x2”)
SCT 4200 075 0075 2 SCT 4300 075 0075 3 75 x 75 mm (3”x3”)
SCT 4200 100 0050 2 SCT 4300 100 0050 3 100 x 50 mm (4”x2”)
SCT 4200 100 0075 2 SCT 4300 100 0075 3 100 x 75 mm (4”x3”) H
H
SCT 4200 100 0100 2 SCT 4300 100 0100 3 100 x 100 mm (4”x4”)
SCT 4200 150 0050 2 SCT 4300 150 0050 3 150 x 50 mm (6”x2”) W
W
SCT 4200 150 0075 2 SCT 4300 150 0075 3 150 x 75 mm (6”x3”)
SCT 4200 150 0100 2 SCT 4300 150 0100 3 150 x 100 mm (6”x4”)
SCT 4200 150 0150 2 SCT 4300 150 0150 3 150 x 150 mm (6”x6”)
SCT 4200 200 0100 2 SCT 4300 200 0100 3 200 x 100 mm (8”x4”)
SCT 4200 300 0100 2 SCT 4300 300 0100 3 300 x 100 mm (12”x4”)
Straight length
SCT 4200 450 0100 2 SCT 4300 450 0100 3 450 x 100 mm (18”x4”)
SCT 4200 600 0100 2 SCT 4300 600 0100 3 600 x 100 mm (24”x4”)

- To order other thicknesses :1.4 mm, 1.6 mm, 1.8 mm and 2.0
mm, kindly check ”how to order” on page 33.
- Other dimensions are available upon request.
Bend 90° inside Lid
Straight length
Central reducer
Tee top lid Top lid bend 90°

Intersection

Top lid bend square 90°

inside lid bend 45°

Central two dimensions reducer

113
Trunking Runs
Double Compartment Cable Trunking
Thickness: 0.9 mm - 1.2 mm
Available trunkings’ lengths are:
- 2440 mm / 3000 mm

DCT - 5200

Reference Dimensions

0.9 mm 1.2 mm mm inch

DCT 5200 050 0050 2 DCT 5300 050 0050 3 50 x 50 mm (2”x2”)


DCT 5200 075 0050 2 DCT 5300 075 0050 3 75 x 50 mm (3”x2”)
DCT 5200 075 0075 2 DCT 5300 075 0075 3 75 x 75 mm (3”x3”)
DCT 5200 100 0050 2 DCT 5300 100 0050 3 100 x 50 mm (4”x2”)
DCT 5200 100 0075 2 DCT 5300 100 0075 3 100 x 75 mm (4”x3”)
DCT 5200 100 0100 2 DCT 5300 100 0100 3 100 x 100 mm (4”x4”)
DCT 5200 150 0050 2 DCT 5300 150 0050 3 150 x 50 mm (6”x2”)
DCT 5200 150 0075 2 DCT 5300 150 0075 3 150 x 75 mm (6”x3”)
DCT 5200 150 0100 2 DCT 5300 150 0100 3 150 x 100 mm (6”x4”)
DCT 5200 150 0150 2 DCT 5300 150 0150 3 150 x 150 mm (6”x6”)
DCT 5200 200 0100 2 DCT 5300 200 0100 3 200 x 100 mm (8”x4”)
DCT 5200 300 0100 2 DCT 5300 300 0100 3 300 x 100 mm (12”x4”)
DCT 5200 450 0100 2 DCT 5300 450 0100 3 450 x 100 mm (18”x4”)
DCT 5200 600 0100 2 DCT 5300 600 0100 3 600 x 100 mm (24”x4”)

- To order other thicknesses :1.4 mm, 1.6 mm, 1.8 mm and 2.0 mm,
kindly check ”how to order” on page 33.
- Other dimensions are available upon request.

Type 1: inside Type 2: outside

H
H

W
W

114
Triple Compartment Cable Trunking
Thickness: 0.9 mm - 1.2 mm
Available trunkings’ lengths are:
- 2440 mm / 3000 mm

TCT - 6200 U / TCT - 6200 L

Reference Dimensions

0.9 mm 1.2 mm mm inch

TCT 6200 050 0050 2 TCT 6300 050 0050 3 50 x 50 mm (2”x2”)


TCT 6200 075 0050 2 TCT 6300 075 0050 3 75 x 50 mm (3”x2”)
TCT 6200 075 0075 2 TCT 6300 075 0075 3 75 x 75 mm (3”x3”)
TCT 6200 100 0050 2 TCT 6300 100 0050 3 100 x 50 mm (4”x2”)
TCT 6200 100 0075 2 TCT 6300 100 0075 3 100 x 75 mm (4”x3”)
TCT 6200 100 0100 2 TCT 6300 100 0100 3 100 x 100 mm (4”x4”)
TCT 6200 150 0050 2 TCT 6300 150 0050 3 150 x 50 mm (6”x2”)
TCT 6200 150 0075 2 TCT 6300 150 0075 3 150 x 75 mm (6”x3”)
TCT 6200 150 0100 2 TCT 6300 150 0100 3 150 x 100 mm (6”x4”)
TCT 6200 150 0150 2 TCT 6300 150 0150 3 150 x 150 mm (6”x6”)
TCT 6200 200 0100 2 TCT 6300 200 0100 3 200 x 100 mm (8”x4”)
TCT 6200 300 0100 2 TCT 6300 300 0100 3 300 x 100 mm (12”x4”)
TCT 6200 450 0100 2 TCT 6300 450 0100 3 450 x 100 mm (18”x4”)
TCT 6200 600 0100 2 TCT 6300 600 01003 600 x 100 mm (24”x4”)

- To order other thicknesses :1.4 mm, 1.6 mm,1.8 mm and 2.0 mm,
kindly check ”how to order” on page 26.
- Other dimensions are available upon request.
Type 1: inside Type 2: outside
U - Separator Type

H
H

W
W

L - Separator Type

115
FITTINGS
Fittings

BEND 450 TOP LID


TL45 7110 - 7115 Thickness: 0.9 mm - 1.2 mm

Reference Dimensions

0.9 mm 1.2 mm mm inch

TL45 7110 050 0050 2 TL45 7115 050 0050 3 50 x 50 mm (2”x2”)


TL45 7110 075 0050 2 TL45 7115 075 0050 3 75 x 50 mm (3”x2”)
TL45 7110 075 0075 2 TL45 7115 075 0075 3 75 x 75 mm (3”x3”)
TL45 7110 100 0050 2 TL45 7115 100 0050 3 100 x 50 mm (4”x2”)
TL45 7110 100 0075 2 TL45 7115 100 0075 3 100 x 75 mm (4”x3”)
TL45 7110 100 0100 2 TL45 7115 100 0100 3 100 x 100 mm (4”x4”)
TL45 7110 150 0050 2 TL45 7115 150 0050 3 150 x 50 mm (6”x2”)
TL45 7110 150 0075 2 TL45 7115 150 0075 3 150 x 75 mm (6”x3”)
TL45 7110 150 0100 2 TL45 7115 150 0100 3 150 x 100 mm (6”x4”) Type 1: inside Type 2: outside
TL45 7110 150 0150 2 TL45 7115 150 0150 3 150 x 150 mm (6”x6”)
TL45 7110 200 0100 2 TL45 7115 200 0100 3 200 x 100 mm (8”x4”)
H
TL45 7110 300 0100 2 TL45 7115 300 0100 3 300 x 100 mm (12”x4”) H

TL45 7110 450 0100 2 TL45 7115 450 0100 3 450 x 100 mm (18”x4”)
W
W
TL45 7110 600 0100 2 TL45 7115 600 0100 3 600 x 100 mm (24”x4”)

- To order other thicknesses :1.4 mm, 1.6 mm,1.8 mm and 2.0 mm, kindly check ”how to order” on page 26 .
- Other dimensions are available upon request.

BEND 450 INSIDE LID


IL45 7210 - 7215 Thickness: 0.9 mm - 1.2 mm

Reference Dimensions

0.9 mm 1.2 mm mm inch

IL45 7210 050 0050 2 IL45 7215 050 0050 3 50 x 50 mm (2”x2”)


IL45 7210 075 0050 2 IL45 7215 075 0050 3 75 x 50 mm (3”x2”)
IL45 7210 075 0075 2 IL45 7215 075 0075 3 75 x 75 mm (3”x3”)
IL45 7210 100 0050 2 IL45 7215 100 0050 3 100 x 50 mm (4”x2”)
IL45 7210 100 0075 2 IL45 7215 100 0075 3 100 x 75 mm (4”x3”)
IL45 7210 100 0100 2 IL45 7215 100 0100 3 100 x 100 mm (4”x4”)
IL45 7210 150 0050 2 IL45 7215 150 0050 3 150 x 50 mm (6”x2”)
IL45 7210 150 0075 2 IL45 7215 150 0075 3 150 x 75 mm (6”x3”)
IL45 7210 150 0100 2 IL45 7215 150 0100 3 150 x 100 mm (6”x4”) Type 1: inside Type 2: outside
IL45 7210 150 0150 2 IL45 7215 150 0150 3 150 x 150 mm (6”x6”)
IL45 7210 200 0100 2 IL45 7215 200 0100 3 200 x 100 mm (8”x4”)
H
IL45 7210 300 0100 2 IL45 7215 300 0100 3 300 x 100 mm (12”x4”) H

IL45 7210 450 0100 2 IL45 7215 450 0100 3 450 x 100 mm (18”x4”)
W
W
IL45 7210 600 0100 2 IL45 7215 600 0100 3 600 x 100 mm (24”x4”)

- To order other thicknesses :1.4 mm, 1.6 mm,1.8 mm and 2.0 mm, kindly check ”how to order” on page 26 .
- Other dimensions are available upon request.

117
Fittings

BEND 450 OUTSIDE LID


OL45 7310 - 7315 Thickness: 0.9 mm - 1.2 mm

Reference Dimensions

0.9 mm 1.2 mm mm inch

OL45 7310 050 0050 2 OL45 7315 050 0050 3 50 x 50 mm (2”x2”)


OL45 7310 075 0050 2 OL45 7315 075 0050 3 75 x 50 mm (3”x2”)
OL45 7310 075 0075 2 OL45 7315 075 0075 3 75 x 75 mm (3”x3”)
OL45 7310 100 0050 2 OL45 7315 100 0050 3 100 x 50 mm (4”x2”)
OL45 7310 100 0075 2 OL45 7315 100 0075 3 100 x 75 mm (4”x3”)
OL45 7310 100 0100 2 OL45 7315 100 0100 3 100 x 100 mm (4”x4”)
OL45 7310 150 0050 2 OL45 7315 150 0050 3 150 x 50 mm (6”x2”)
OL45 7310 150 0075 2 OL45 7315 150 0075 3 150 x 75 mm (6”x3”)
OL45 7310 150 0100 2 OL45 7315 150 0100 3 150 x 100 mm (6”x4”) Type 1: inside Type 2: outside
OL45 7310 150 0150 2 OL45 7315 150 0150 3 150 x 150 mm (6”x6”)
OL45 7310 200 0100 2 OL45 7315 200 0100 3 200 x 100 mm (8”x4”)
H
OL45 7310 300 0100 2 OL45 7315 300 0100 3 300 x 100 mm (12”x4”) H

OL45 7310 450 0100 2 OL45 7315 450 0100 3 450 x 100 mm (18”x4”)
W
W
OL45 7310 600 0100 2 OL45 7315 600 0100 3 600 x 100 mm (24”x4”)

- To order other thicknesses :1.4 mm, 1.6 mm,1.8 mm and 2.0 mm, kindly check ”how to order” on page 26 .
- Other dimensions are available upon request.

BEND 900 TOP LID


TL90 7410 - 7415 Thickness: 0.9 mm - 1.2 mm TL90 7410 C

Reference Dimensions

0.9 mm 1.2 mm mm inch


Cornered

TL90 7410 050 0050 2 TL90 7415 050 0050 3 50 x 50 mm (2”x2”)


TL90 7410 075 0050 2 TL90 7415 075 0050 3 75 x 50 mm (3”x2”)
TL90 7410 075 0075 2 TL90 7415 075 0075 3 75 x 75 mm (3”x3”)
TL90 7410 100 0050 2 TL90 7415 100 0050 3 100 x 50 mm (4”x2”)
TL90 7410 100 0075 2 TL90 7415 100 0075 3 100 x 75 mm (4”x3”)
TL90 7410 100 0100 2 TL90 7415 100 0100 3 100 x 100 mm (4”x4”)
TL90 7410 150 0050 2 TL90 7415 150 0050 3 150 x 50 mm (6”x2”)
TL90 7410 150 0075 2 TL90 7415 150 0075 3 150 x 75 mm (6”x3”)
TL90 7410 150 0100 2 TL90 7415 150 0100 3 150 x 100 mm (6”x4”) Type 1: inside Type 2: outside
TL90 7410 150 0150 2 TL90 7415 150 0150 3 150 x 150 mm (6”x6”)
TL90 7410 200 0100 2 TL90 7415 200 0100 3 200 x 100 mm (8”x4”)
H
TL90 7410 300 0100 2 TL90 7415 300 0100 3 300 x 100 mm (12”x4”) H

TL90 7410 450 0100 2 TL90 7415 450 0100 3 450 x 100 mm (18”x4”)
W
W
TL90 7410 600 0100 2 TL90 7415 600 0100 3 600 x 100 mm (24”x4”)

- To order other thicknesses :1.4 mm, 1.6 mm,1.8 mm and 2.0 mm, kindly check ”how to order” on page 26 .
- Other dimensions are available upon request.

118
BEND 900 INSIDE LID
IL90 7510 - 7515 Thickness: 0.9 mm - 1.2 mm

Reference Dimensions

0.9 mm 1.2 mm mm inch

IL90 7510 050 0050 2 IL90 7515 050 0050 3 50 x 50 mm (2”x2”)


IL90 7510 075 0050 2 IL90 7515 075 0050 3 75 x 50 mm (3”x2”)
IL90 7510 075 0075 2 IL90 7515 075 0075 3 75 x 75 mm (3”x3”)
IL90 7510 100 0050 2 IL90 7515 100 0050 3 100 x 50 mm (4”x2”)
IL90 7510 100 0075 2 IL90 7515 100 0075 3 100 x 75 mm (4”x3”)
IL90 7510 100 0100 2 IL90 7515 100 0100 3 100 x 100 mm (4”x4”)
IL90 7510 150 0050 2 IL90 7515 150 0050 3 150 x 50 mm (6”x2”)
IL90 7510 150 0075 2 IL90 7515 150 0075 3 150 x 75 mm (6”x3”)
IL90 7510 150 0100 2 IL90 7515 150 0100 3 150 x 100 mm (6”x4”) Type 1: inside Type 2: outside
IL90 7510 150 0150 2 IL90 7515 150 0150 3 150 x 150 mm (6”x6”)
IL90 7510 200 0100 2 IL90 7515 200 0100 3 200 x 100 mm (8”x4”)
H
IL90 7510 300 0100 2 IL90 7515 300 0100 3 300 x 100 mm (12”x4”) H

IL90 7510 450 0100 2 IL90 7515 450 0100 3 450 x 100 mm (18”x4”)
W
W
IL90 7510 600 0100 2 IL90 7515 600 0100 3 600 x 100 mm (24”x4”)

- To order other thicknesses :1.4 mm, 1.6 mm,1.8 mm and 2.0 mm, kindly check ”how to order” on page 26 .
- Other dimensions are available upon request.

BEND 900 OUTSIDE LID


OL90 7610 - 7615 Thickness: 0.9 mm - 1.2 mm

Reference Dimensions

0.9 mm 1.2 mm mm inch

OL90 7610 050 0050 2 OL90 7615 050 0050 3 50 x 50 mm (2”x2”)


OL90 7610 075 0050 2 OL90 7615 075 0050 3 75 x 50 mm (3”x2”)
OL90 7610 075 0075 2 OL90 7615 075 0075 3 75 x 75 mm (3”x3”)
OL90 7610 100 0050 2 OL90 7615 100 0050 3 100 x 50 mm (4”x2”)
OL90 7610 100 0075 2 OL90 7615 100 0075 3 100 x 75 mm (4”x3”)
OL90 7610 100 0100 2 OL90 7615 100 0100 3 100 x 100 mm (4”x4”)
OL90 7610 150 0050 2 OL90 7615 150 0050 3 150 x 50 mm (6”x2”)
OL90 7610 150 0075 2 OL90 7615 150 0075 3 150 x 75 mm (6”x3”)
OL90 7610 150 0100 2 OL90 7615 150 0100 3 150 x 100 mm (6”x4”) Type 1: inside Type 2: outside
OL90 7610 150 0150 2 OL90 7615 150 0150 3 150 x 150 mm (6”x6”)
OL90 7610 200 0100 2 OL90 7615 200 0100 3 200 x 100 mm (8”x4”)
H
OL90 7610 300 0100 2 OL90 7615 300 0100 3 300 x 100 mm (12”x4”) H

OL90 7610 450 0100 2 OL90 7615 450 0100 3 450 x 100 mm (18”x4”)
W
W
OL90 7610 600 0100 2 OL90 7615 600 0100 3 600 x 100 mm (24”x4”)

- To order other thicknesses :1.4 mm, 1.6 mm,1.8 mm and 2.0 mm, kindly check ”how to order” on page 26 .
- Other dimensions are available upon request.

119
Fittings

TEE BEND TOP LID


TBTL 7710 - 7715 Thickness: 0.9 mm - 1.2 mm

Reference Dimensions

0.9 mm 1.2 mm mm inch

TBTL 7710 050 0050 2 TBTL 7715 050 0050 3 50 x 50 mm (2”x2”)


TBTL 7710 075 0050 2 TBTL 7715 075 0050 3 75 x 50 mm (3”x2”)
TBTL 7710 075 0075 2 TBTL 7715 075 0075 3 75 x 75 mm (3”x3”)
TBTL 7710 100 0050 2 TBTL 7715 100 0050 3 100 x 50 mm (4”x2”)
TBTL 7710 100 0075 2 TBTL 7715 100 0075 3 100 x 75 mm (4”x3”)
TBTL 7710 100 0100 2 TBTL 7715 100 0100 3 100 x 100 mm (4”x4”)
TBTL 7710 150 0050 2 TBTL 7715 150 0050 3 150 x 50 mm (6”x2”)
TBTL 7710 150 0075 2 TBTL 7715 150 0075 3 150 x 75 mm (6”x3”)
TBTL 7710 150 0100 2 TBTL 7715 150 0100 3 150 x 100 mm (6”x4”) Type 1: inside Type 2: outside
TBTL 7710 150 0150 2 TBTL 7715 150 0150 3 150 x 150 mm (6”x6”)
TBTL 7710 200 0100 2 TBTL 7715 200 0100 3 200 x 100 mm (8”x4”)
H
TBTL 7710 300 0100 2 TBTL 7715 300 0100 3 300 x 100 mm (12”x4”) H

TBTL 7710 450 0100 2 TBTL 7715 450 0100 3 450 x 100 mm (18”x4”)
W
W
TBTL 7710 600 0100 2 TBTL 7715 600 0100 3 600 x 100 mm (24”x4”)

- To order other thicknesses :1.4 mm, 1.6 mm,1.8 mm and 2.0 mm, kindly check ”how to order” on page 26 .
- Other dimensions are available upon request.

TOP BEND INSIDE LID


TBiL 7810 - 7815 Thickness: 0.9 mm - 1.2 mm

Reference Dimensions

0.9 mm 1.2 mm mm inch

TBIL 7810 050 0050 2 TBIL 7815 050 0050 3 50 x 50 mm (2”x2”)


TBIL 7810 075 0050 2 TBIL 7815 075 0050 3 75 x 50 mm (3”x2”)
TBIL 7810 075 0075 2 TBIL 7815 075 0075 3 75 x 75 mm (3”x3”)
TBIL 7810 100 0050 2 TBIL 7815 100 0050 3 100 x 50 mm (4”x2”)
TBIL 7810 100 0075 2 TBIL 7815 100 0075 3 100 x 75 mm (4”x3”)
TBIL 7810 100 0100 2 TBIL 7815 100 0100 3 100 x 100 mm (4”x4”)
TBIL 7810 150 0050 2 TBIL 7815 150 0050 3 150 x 50 mm (6”x2”)
TBIL 7810 150 0075 2 TBIL 7815 150 0075 3 150 x 75 mm (6”x3”)
TBIL 7810 150 0100 2 TBIL 7815 150 0100 3 150 x 100 mm (6”x4”) Type 1: inside Type 2: outside
TBIL 7810 150 0150 2 TBIL 7815 150 0150 3 150 x 150 mm (6”x6”)
TBIL 7810 200 0100 2 TBIL 7815 200 0100 3 200 x 100 mm (8”x4”)
H
TBIL 7810 300 0100 2 TBIL 7815 300 0100 3 300 x 100 mm (12”x4”) H

TBIL 7810 450 0100 2 TBIL 7815 450 0100 3 450 x 100 mm (18”x4”)
W
W
TBIL 7810 600 0100 2 TBIL 7815 600 0100 3 600 x 100 mm (24”x4”)

- To order other thicknesses :1.4 mm, 1.6 mm,1.8 mm and 2.0 mm, kindly check ”how to order” on page 26 .
- Other dimensions are available upon request.

120
Fittings

REDUCER
Thickness: 0.9 mm - 1.2 mm
Reducers are usually manufactured to fit all available trunking sizes
and required reduction.
Right Reducer
AR 9010 - 9015

Reference Dimensions

0.9 mm 1.2 mm mm

AR 9010 075 0050 2 AR 9010 075 0050 3 75 x 75 mm - 50 x 50 mm


AR 9010 100 0050 2 AR 9010 100 0050 3 100 x 100 mm - 100 x 50 mm
AR 9010 100 0075 2 AR 9010 100 0075 3 100 x 100 mm - 75 x 75 mm
AR 9010 100 0050 2 AR 9010 100 0050 3 100 x 100 mm - 50 x 50 mm
AR 9010 150 0075 2 AR 9010 150 0075 3 150 x 150 mm - 75 x 75 mm
AR 9010 150 0050 2 AR 9010 150 0050 3 150 x 150 mm - 50 x 50 mm
AR 9010 200 0300 2 AR 9010 200 0300 3 200 x 100 mm - 300 x 100 mm
AR 9010 300 0450 2 AR 9010 300 0450 3 300 x 100 mm - 450 x 100 mm
AR 9010 450 0600 2 AR 9010 450 0600 3 450 x 100 mm - 600 x 100 mm Type 1: inside Type 2: outside

H
H

W
W

Central Reducer Left Reducer Central two dimensions


CR 9010 - 9015 LR 9010 - 9015 CR2 9010 - 9015

S P
- To order other thicknesses :1.4 mm, 1.6 mm, 1.8 mm and 2.0
mm, kindly check ”how to order” on page 33.

F
- Other dimensions are available upon request.

S
FLANGE
CONNECTOR
U-CONNECTOR

TRUNKING

HANGER

121
UNDER
FLOOR
TRUNKING
UNDER FLOOR TRUNKING

1- Flush Trunking
2- Screed Trunking
3- Raised Access Floor Trunking
Uni-Metal, Underfloor
A Trunking Systems solutions
A Stainless incorporate a range of products for the distribution of power
steel insert
B Lid and trim
and data services , it is a coordinated set of containments that protect, segregate, contain, and route cables
C Wiring devices plates
within B a given environment. D Backbox

A.Protection
C
Cables and wires running within containment need to be protected from vermin, tripping, and accidental
breakage. This can be achieved using appropriate cable management solutions.
D 2|SCREED FLOOR SYSTEMS

B. Segregation The screed floor backbox is supplied with


D
The cable containment provides the required segregation between services a likespecial cover allowing floor box height
power, data, telephone
adjustment according to different screed
and any other ELV systems. Segregation is normally achieved using metal partitions to prevent
thicknesses. The floor interference.
box is also
available for tile and marble applications.
C.Containment
Cluttered wires that are run loosely within an environment are an eyesore. This could be resolved by resorting to
appropriate cable management schemes that contain the wires, and restore order in such environments.

D.Routing
Cable Management enables wires to be routed into inaccessible areas by innovative solutions such as the use of
false floors. Open plan offices are serviced using floor distribution systems.

1 B
A
A Stainless steel
insert
B Lid and trim
C Wiring devices plates
D Support plate for floor
C boxes
1|FLUSH FLOOR SYSTEM
D The support plate for floor boxes allows
fitting of lid and trim directly on the
1|FLUSH FLOOR SYSTEM
metal trunking.
The support plate for floor boxes
allows fitting of lid and trim
directlyinon
Uni-Metal Flush Floor Trunking Systems, are more popular than inscreed floor systems the metal
areas wheretrunking.
flexibility is
desired, with an increased demand on cable capacity.

Office environment demands the usage of an increasing number of data and telephone cables.
The advent of structured cabling has resulted in greater space requirements and therefore more constraints from the
installation perspective.

Additionally, there has been a call for flexibility within newly built open office plans. This flexibility is offered by Uni-
Metal’s Flush Floor Trunking Systems. Cables Containment for the Flush Floor System in comparison to raised floor
trunking systems, the flexibility and cable capacity offered by a flush floor trunking system is lesser.

Floor boxes within a flush floor system can be relocated along the run of the trunking, while raised floor boxes can be
relocated anywhere on the floor area. Relative advantages of a flush floor trunking system over raised floor trunkings
include accessibility and reduced overall system cost.

124
Uni-Metal Flush Floor Trunkings render flexibility to the end user in relocating floor boxes.
The partitions are fully removable to accommodate service box modules.

The service box modules are fully reversible to enable repositioning of the floor boxes.
The trap and frame of the Uni-Metal service boxes can be positioned on all four sides, enabling easy access
and cable exit in all directions.

2 A A
B
Stainless steel insert
Lid and trim
C Wiring devices plates
B
D Backbox

C 2|SCREED FLOOR SYSTEMS


The screed floor backbox is
D supplied with SYSTEMS
2|SCREED FLOOR a special cover
Soluflex floor system
see p. 6 allowing floor box height
The screed floor backbox is supplied with
aadjustment according to
D
Grommet special cover allowing floor box height
see p. 46 different according
adjustment A screed to different
thicknesses.
screed
The floor The
thicknesses. boxfloor
is box
alsois also
available
available for tile
for tile and and Bmarble
marble applications.
applications.
Stainless steel insert Ap. 40
Lid and trim p.B 40
Wiring devices platesCp. 41
Uni-Metal offers a less expensive cable containment service for the open
3 modules p.D18offices
C
to ensure the cable
D outlets for the
various services for the all stations. Support frame p. E 18

Screed Floor System is a pre-cast cable containment service in position within the office premises. ERunning from the
main distribution boards for electrical / data voice / CCMS services routed via the vertical elbow, junction boxes and
ducting to the services outlet boxes underneath the work stations.
1 | SOLUFLEX FLOOR SYSTEM
Soluflex
Junction Boxes floor
arebox tile allowswith
featured installation
slim trimming for the granite, marble or ceramic floor finishes with recess on the traps
of full backbox or modular backbox.
for various floor finishes embedding.
Minimum floor height : 90 mm.
A
Stainless
Uni-Metal base boxes are die-cast in one pieceinsert steel the box uniformity on the tough floor surfaces. Base boxes,
to maintain
A

B
traps and frames are made of a non-corrosiveB die-cast alloy.
Lid and trim
C Wiring devices plates
D Support plate for floor
C boxes

3
A
1|FLUSH FLOOR SYSTEM
B
D The support plate for floor boxes allows
A Carpet
fitting of lid and trim directly on the
B Lid and frame
metal trunking.
C Wiring devices plates
C
D Full backbox
D

3 | RAISED ACCESS FLOORING


Full backbox or adjustable
3 |height
RAISED ACCESS
multi FLOORING
basket support
can
Full be easily
backbox fitted after
or adjustable heightcutting
multi
basket
floorsupport
slabs. can be easily fitted after
cutting floor slabs.

Raised Floor Trunking Systems are increasingly adopted in new commercial buildings .
Cable containment services are in modular design for the day-to-day changes within the office premises, for the ease of
cable termination for the various services, such as computer / data / voice and BMS / CCMS structured cabling, where
the raised floor makes a new level for cables containment in the floor void.

125
FLUSH FLOOR TRUNKING SYSTEM
Flush floor trunking system combines robustness and reliability, allowing power and data distribution throughout
concrete floors. The system facilitates frequent maintenance operations or eventual changes of floor box locations.
Different accessories ensure quick installation and perfect integration into the concrete floor.

Metal trunking

Junction box

Stainless steel insert

Lid and trim

Support plate for floor boxes

structural floor slab

5
Flush floor trunking in screeded
floor

126
Riser

Fixing bracket

Coupler

A Flush Floor Trunking system has a lesser loading capacity than an inscreed system, as the entire trunking is fixed flush with
the finished floor. As loads constantly impinge on the floor trunking, the load bearing capacity of the system is reduced.

In a raised floor trunking system the boxes are the only load carrying components within the floor system. The boxes
are suspended within raised flooring, and are capable of carrying dynamic loads normally seen within floor spaces.

The average design loads on floor distribution system are as shown below .As the traffic increases, the
load expected to impinge on the floor boxes could increase, and increase the stress on the floor boxes.

The system chosen should be capable of taking the following loads per square meter :
Commercial Office -3kN
Shopping Mall -6kN
Exhibition Halls -6kN
Conference Rooms / Hotel -3kN
Corridors -5kN

127
Flush Trunking and Accessories
System overview
Material: pre-galvanised steel sheet
G Standard Length (L): 2440 / 3000 mm
H Number of Compartments: 3 and 4 compartments
Standard Height (H): 65 mm
C Standard Thickness: 1.5 mm for body/2.5 mm for cov-
E
ers/1 mm for dividers

Example of Layout
F A
For optimal flexibility of the installation, the trunking is
usually installed on either a Grid, Fishbone or a Comb
D
Pattern of single, double or triple runs.
B

Grid Pattern
A Trunking
B End cap
C Junction box
D Coupler and leveling kit
E Fixing bracket and leveling for trunking
F Leveling for junction box

G Riser

H Floor box (support plate + lid and trim) Socket


outlets and data sockets plates to be ordered separately A Grid Pattern is widely used in areas where the occupants
Standards require the highest degree of flexibility in reconfiguring
Metal trunking according to standards EN 60-670 and EN 50085-2.2 workspace. Capacity can be increased by returning
It ensures constant performance along the entire distribution up to individual ring mains through the different runs of
the user connection point trunking, which in itself allows easier installation.
Classification for flush floor Flush floor
Fishbone Pattern
Resistance to impact for installation
6.2 2.0 J
and application

Minimum storage and transport


6.3 - 25 °C
temperature
Minimum installation and application
6.3 - 5 °C
temperature
6.3 Maximum application temperature + 60 °C
6.4 Resistance to flame propagation Non-flame propagating
With electrical
continuity characteristic
6.5 Electrical continuity characteristics
(metal ducting & The Fishbone Pattern is ideal for a medium sized area
accessories)
where fewer boxes are required.
Without electrical
insulating characteristic
6.6 Electrical insulating characteristics
(metal ducting & Comb Pattern
accessories)
Degree of protection provided by
6.7 IP 20
enclosure
6.9 System access cover retention With a tool
For dry-treatment of
6.101 Floor treatment
floor The Comb Pattern is the most economical way of
6.102
Resistance to a vertical load applied
1500 N (1) installation in which a minimum of trunking is used The
over a small surface area
Comb Pattern is suited for small to medium office areas.
Optional classification: resistance to
6.103 vertical load applied through large 3000 N
surface area
6.103 Rated voltage 500 V
6.103 Protection against lechanical impact IK 08
(1) For 4 compartments, resistance to vertical load applied over a small
surface area = 750 N

128
Composition and Functions of Flush Trunking System

Composition and functions for Flush Trunking System


Conforms with BS EN 50085-1: 2005 and EN 50085-2.2. Provides power and data distribution channels in concrete
floors. This robust system offers a high degree of flexibility for applications requiring frequent maintenance or frequent
layout changes .

Trunking
Length : 2440 mm / 3000 mm Item W H L
Number (mm) (mm) (mm)
Height : 65 mm
3 and 4 compartments FTR 300 300 65 2440/3000
H L
FTR 400 405 65 2440/3000

Junction boxes Item W H L


Direct access to cables at the Number (mm) (mm) (mm)
intersection of trunkings
FJB 360 360 66.6 360
For 300 x 65 mm trunking H
For 405 x 65 mm trunking FJB 465 465 66.6 465
W L

Risers
For 300 x 65 mm trunking Item W H L
Number (mm) (mm) (mm)
For 405 x 65 mm trunking L
FRI 300 300 65 201

FRI 405 405 65 201 W H


H

Support plate for floor Item A B C D


Number (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
boxes 6896 36 264 264 406.4 300
To be fitted with lid and trim,
Integrating socket outlets or support 6896 37 264 264 406.5 405
plates 6896 47 264 340 406.5 405

Leveling kit for trunking End caps


For raising trunking level up to 70 to For 300 x 65 mm trunking
90 mm For 405 x 65 mm trunking
For 300 x 65 mm trunking
For 405 x 65 mm trunking

Fixing bracket (FB)


Leveling kit for junction Coupler For fixing trunking on floor or on
For joining trunkings
boxes leveling bracket
For raising junction box level up to 70 to
90 mm

129
Cable capacity guide
The number and location of boxes depend upon the end user’s requirement.
A floor box has to be considered for each workstation or desk with an average of 1 FB for every 10 m2
Capacity: maximum number of conductors per compartment (for one specific cable type)
Stranded Twin & earth

Available
section 1,5² 2,5² 4² 6² 10² 16² 25² 2,5² 4² 6²
at 45 % fill Ø3.3 Ø4 Ø4.6 Ø5.2 Ø6.7 Ø7.8 Ø9.7 Ø10.5 Ø11.2 Ø3.3 cat. 5e cat. 5e cat. 6 cat. 6
Ducting Compartment mm² UTP Ø5.5 STP Ø6 UTP Ø6.5 STP Ø7
300 x 65 1 2992 348 237 180 141 85 63 40 35 30 20 99 83 71 61

2 2086 243 166 126 98 59 44 28 24 21 14 69 58 49 43

3 2992 348 237 180 141 85 63 40 35 30 20 99 83 71 61


405 x 65 1 3389 394 269 204 160 96 71 46 39 34 23 112 94 80 69

2 4200 488 333 253 198 119 88 57 49 42 28 139 117 100 86

3 3389 394 269 204 160 96 71 46 39 34 23 112 94 80 69

The above table gives the available capacity units on a 45 % factor, applied to the internal wiring area

Installation Principle

The entire flush floor trunking system and accessories used shall be supplied and installed strictly according to the
recommendations and instructions of the manufacturer.

1- Mark the pathway for trunking and junction boxes


2- Fix risers junction boxes on the Fix Trunking and all accessories with fixing brackets slab.
3- Fix trunking and all accessories with fixing brackets
4- If levelling is required, use levelling kits and do not exceed 1.2 m between levelling brackets

130
SFSP 11188

mm
ax
10

11188

5- Pour concrete 6- Earth the system (minimum every 10 m)

7- Once the screed is dry, remove the covers 8- To fit the floor box, remove cover and the rubber
and the cable trunking gasket. Remove the dividers, fix them up-side-down
and reposition rubber gasket

9- To fit the floor box, remove cover and the rubber 10- Fix floor box support plate, and earth it
gasket. Remove the dividers, fix them up-side-down
and reposition rubber gasket

8 mm
15 mm
max.

11- Connect wiring and fix the wiring accessory plates. 12- Fit the carpet and clip the lid and trim on
the support plate (push and fit principle)

131
SCREED FLOOR TRUNKING SYSTEM
Screed metallic trunkings are a quick and easy way to install power and data distribution throughout screed
floors. These systems are particularly robust and are designed to support superior loads. Junction boxes and
risers allow easy access when installing cables or for extensions.

Trunking

Stainless steel insert

Lid and trim

Backbox

Fixing bracket
Coupler

Screed Trunking in screeded


floor

132
Riser

Screed Trunking
ScreedTrunking
Screed Floor Trunking
its is alsoTrunking
Screed available in variable
isitsalso
itscom ispartments.
also available
available in variable
inWiring capacity
variable
compartments.
can be
compartments. easily increased on site
byWiring
Wiring clippingcapacity caneasily
together
capacity can be be easily
increased
increased on site
on site by clipping
by clipping together
together

133
Flush Trunking and Accessories
System Overview
Material: pre-galvanised steel sheet
Standard length: 2440 / 3000 mm

SFSP
Number of Compartments: 3 and 4 compartments
G E Standard Height: 25 mm and 38 mm
Standard Thickness: 1.2 mm for body/1 mm for dividers

D C F
B A Example of Layout
For optimal flexibility of the installation, the trunking is
usually installed on either a Grid, Fishbone or a Comb
Pattern of single, double or triple runs.

Grid Pattern
A Ducting F Riser

B Coupler G Floor box (back-box +


lid and trim) Socket outlets and
C junction box data socket plates to be ordered
separately
D Fixing bracket

E Vertical trunking such as DLP

Standards
Standard EN 60-670 and EN 50085-2-2 concerns systems for
distributing currents in the floor (sunken or surface mounted).
It ensures constant performance along the entire distribution up to
the user connection point . A Grid Pattern is widely used in areas where the occupants
Classification for flush floor Flush floor require the highest level of flexibility in reconfiguring
Resistance to impact for installation workspace.Capacity can be increased by returning
6.2 2.0 J
and application individual ring mains through the different runs of
Minimum storage and transport trunking,which in itself allows easier installation.
6.3 - 25 °C
temperature

6.3
Minimum installation and application
- 5 °C
Fishbone Pattern
temperature
6.3 Maximum application temperature + 60 °C
6.4 Resistance to flame propagation Non-flame propagating
Without electrical
continuity characteristic
(PVC ducting) With
6.5 Electrical continuity characteristics
electrical continuity
characteristic (metal
ducting & accessories)
With electrical The Fishbone Pattern is ideal for a medium sized area
insulating characteristic
(PVC ducting) Without
where fewer boxes are required.
6.6 Electrical insulating characteristics
electrical insulating
characteristic (Metal Comb Pattern
ducting & accessories)
Degree of protection provided by
6.7 IP 20
enclosure
6.9 System access cover retention With a tool
For dry-treatment of
6.101 Floor treatment
floor

6.102
Resistance to vertical load applied
1500 N (1)
The Comb Pattern is the most economical way of
through small surface area
installation in which a minimum of trunking is used.
Optional classification: resistance to The Comb Pattern is suited for small to medium office
6.103 vertical load applied through large 3000 N
surface area areas.
6.103 Rated voltage (PVC ducting) 500 V
Protection against mechanical impact IK 08
(1) For 4 compartments, resistance to vertical load applied over a small
surface area = 750 N

134
Composition and Functions for Screed Trunking System
Material: pre-galvanised sheet Standard thickness: 1.2 mm for body/1 mm for dividers Standard length: 2440 / 3000
mm Number of compartments: 3 and 4 compartments Standard depth: 25 mm and 38 mm

Trunking Item W H L
Trunking height 25 mm Number (mm) (mm) (mm)

225 x 25 mm - 3 compartments STR 25 225 25 2440 / 3000


300 x 25 mm - 3 compartments STR 38 225 38 2440 / 3000
H
Trunking height 38 mm
STR 25-1 300 25 2440 / 3000 L
225 x 38 mm - 3 compartments
W
300 x 38 mm - 3 compartments STR 38-1 300 38 2440 / 3000

Junction boxes Item W H L


For direct access to cables at the Number (mm) (mm) (mm)
H
intersection of floor ductings while SJB 325 325 90 325
maintaining perfect separation between SJB 400 400 90 400
ELV and LV cables L
W
Supplied complete with base,
cover fly-overs and site cover

Risers Item A B C D E
Number (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)

SRI 250 250 89 201 43 52

SRI 325 325 89 201 43 52

Back-boxes Item W H L
To be fitted with lid and trim, Number (mm) (mm) (mm)
H
integrating socket outlets or support 6896 34 325 90 325
plates .Accept screed floor ducting 6896 35 400 90 400
and conduits Ø20 and 25 mm W L
6896 45 400 90 325
Auto-adjustable to screed height
65 up to 90 mm

Dimensions for carpet cut out on Dimensions for carpet cut out on
backbox support frame junction box lid
Item D E F Item D E
Number (mm) (mm) (mm) Number (mm) (mm)

6896 34 276 264 264 6897 22 260 260

6896 35 276 264 264 6897 32 335 335

6896 45 276 264 340

End caps Fixing Bracket (FB) Coupler

135
Cable capacity guide
The number and location of boxes will depend upon the end user’s requirements.
A floor box should be considered for each workstation or desk with an average of 1 FB for every 10 m2

Capacity: maximum number of conductors per compartment (for one specific cable type)
Stranded Twin & earth

Available
section 1,5² 2,5² 4² 6² 10² 16² 25² 2,5² 4² 6² cat. 5e cat. 6
at 45 % fill Ø3.3 Ø4 Ø4.6 Ø5.2 Ø6.7 Ø7.8 Ø9.7 Ø10.5 Ø11.2 Ø3.3 UTP cat. 5e UTP cat. 6
Ducting Compartment mm² Ø5.5 STP Ø6 Ø6.5 STP Ø7

225x25 1 2 3 739 86 59 45 35 21 15 10 9 7 5 24 21 18 15

225x38 1 2 3 1164 135 92 70 55 33 24 16 14 12 8 39 32 28 24

300x25 1 2 3 994 116 79 60 47 28 21 13 12 10 7 33 28 24 20

300x38 1 2 3 1566 182 124 94 74 44 33 21 18 16 11 52 43 37 32

The above table gives the available capacity units on a 45 % factor, applied to the internal wiring area.

Installation Principle

Backbox
Junction Box

1-Mark pathway for trunking, 2-Fix risers, junction boxes and backboxes
junction boxes and backboxes on the slab

H
H min. = 65 mm
H max. = 90 mm

3-Fix trunking with couplers


and fixing brakets
4-Pour concrete

Backbox
A B
Junction Box

A B

5-Remove disposable metal 6-Backbox: lift the frame (A) and retainers will automatically drop out (B).
cover Lock the frame onto the backbox by pushing down clips onto the
threaded rod. Junction box: adjust junction box to floor level

136
Installation Principle

7- Cable ducting and earth junction 8- Connect wiring and fix the wiring accessory
boxes plates onto the backbox. Earth the system

8 mm
15 mm
max.

9- Fit carpet and clip the lid and trim onto the backbox (push and fit principle)

137
RAISED ACCESS FLOOR SYSTEM
Different solutions for all your projects integrating raised access floor allow you to make well organised and
functional offices and save time and money during installation or future reconfiguration. Our solutions have
been designed for reliability, ease of installation and maximum flexibility.

Junction box

Metal trunking

Stainless steel insert

Lid and trim

RAISED ACCESS Module


› RAISED
FLOOR TRUNKINGACCESSSYSTEM
This trunking system is compatible
FLOOR TRUNKING SYSTEM
with any traditional raised access floor
andany
with hastrbeen especially designed
raised access floorto
ensure fast installation, reliability,
and has been especially designed to
robustness and flexibility. y, Support frame
robustness and flexibility.

138
Riser

Coupler

Leveling kit

Screed Trunking
Screed Floor Trunking
its is alsoTrunking
Screed available in variable
its ispartments.
com also available in variable
Wiring capacity
compartments.
can be easily increased on site
byWiring capacity
clipping can be easily
together
increased on site by clipping
togetherBasket Tray / Wire Mesh

139
Floor Boxes
Conforms to IEC 60670-23 and to BS EN 50 085-2.2
Compatible with flush floor trunking systems ,screed floor systems and raised access floor trunking systems.

For Carpet For Tiles / Marble

SFSP
SFSP
Flexible cable exits

SFSP SFSP
3 and 4 compartment floor
SFSP
Rigid cable exits
boxes

Lid and trims for Stainless steel insert for Lid and trim for floor boxes :
carpet. lid To be installed in backbox for screed floor system.
To be fitted on either: to be used instead of To be equipped with dedicated socket outlets
- Modular backbox or fitting carpet onto the lid. - Specific backbox
full backbox for raised For 3 and 4 compartments For installation of floor boxes in screed floor systems.
floor
- Support plate for
flush floor trunking
- Screed floor backbox

SFSP SFSP
To be equipped with
dedicated socket
outlets, Arteor wiring
accessories or 6C
modules
SFSP

140
Empty Wiring Accessories Plates
Support plates Support plates for 6C modules Support plates for Lexic DIN-rail equip-
for Arteor mechanism Support plates for integration of 6C
ment
Support plates for integration of modules in floor boxes
Support plates for integration of DIN-rail
77 mm width plate
equipment in floor boxes .77 mm width
-Flat support plates
plate supplied with transparent plastic
2 modules (2 x 1 module)
cover to avoid accidental handling (1 or

SFSP
4 modules (4 x 1 module)
2 modules)
-Waved support plates
2 modules (2 x 1 module)
4 modules (4 x 1 module)

SFSP
SFSP
77 mm
width

SFSP

SFSP SFSP
Blank plates for floor boxes
To cover an unused
compartment 77 mm and
154 mm width plate

Installation Guide

SFSP SFSP SFSP


1- Cut a slot with template in the panel . 2- Fix base unit to the panel with 3- Install the accessories plates
countersunk screws

SFSP SFSP SFSP


4- Lay the carpet on the raised floor . 5- Mount trap and frames . 6- Lay the carpet in the recess of the
trap.

141
Floor Boxes Installation
Installation Principle
Lid and trim can be used for all applications: screed, flush and raised access floor systems. They allow a uniform finish
within the project .

Lid and trim

SFSP Lid and trim is available in 2 different sizes


(3 compartments or 4 compartments)

Rigid and flexible cable exits Site protection cover


Rigid and flexible cable exits: maximum cable Lid and trim comes with a building site protection
capacity 4 cables ø7 mm + 3 cables ø11 mm. Both to avoid damages during installation. This site
systems provide maximum protection for cables. protection has to be removed to access the floor
Flexible exit does not require closing when not in box and can be repositioned afterwards. Site
use protection cover has to remain on the floor box
until hand-over of the project

Rigid cable exits Soft cable exits

142
Reversible Lid

The lid is reversible (180°) to adapt to office furniture reconfiguration

180˚ B
A

Locking System

The floor box can be locked by means of a locking system on the lid (hidden under the opening handle).
For safety reasons, floor box shall not
be locked when in use

Installation process

1- Fix the lid and trim directly onto the 2- To fit carpet, pull the levers on both sides 3- Fit the carpet to the backbox edge
backbox, push and fit system. Lid and trim to take out the lid and trim
can be assembled with backbox even before
carpet fitting

8 mm
15 mm max.

Stainless steel 3 4
insert compartments compartments

6896 92 6896 93

4- Push the lid and trim back on to the 5- Carpet thickness < 15 mm
backbox .The trim will adjust to the 6- Stainless steel insert optional as an
carpet thickness alternative to filling the lid with carpet. To
fit the stainless steel insert on to the lid,
use the double side tape supplied

143
Installation

1-Determine floor box location and 2-Peel off the pre-punched 3-Fasten the side blank plate.
then fasten with bolts and nuts. knock-outs at the side blank plate
before laying the ductings

4-Lay the steel mesh at the blank. 5-Screeding. 6-After screeding has cured, use ham-
mer to knock and loosen the dispos-
able lid before hooking it out.

Service Box Installation Guide

7.1- Install accessore plates. 8.1 -Mount trap frames and trap 9- Finished floor with carpet
cover.

Junction Box Installation Guide

7.2- Mount the trap frame 8.2 -Finished floor with carpet
and trap cover.

144
Floor Boxes for Tiles / Marble for Screed Floor

65˚

1-To remove the lid from the trim, hold it under an


angle of approximately 65° and pull it out 2-Remove site cover protection from backbox

4-Make a rough adjustment to finished floor level by turn-


3-Place the trim onto the threaded rods ing threaded rods in each corner with a screw driver

5-Cable the system 6-Tiling should be carried out at this stage

65°

7- Make final adjustment to finished floor level by


turning threaded rods in each corner with a screw 8- Push the lid back in place by holding it under an
driver angle of approximately 65°

145
BASKET
TRAYS
SYSTEM
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System allows for fast snap together assemblies

1 2 3 4

Step 1. Align the trays as shown.


Step 2. While raising the rear edge of the male connection, slide the tray forward,
but do not engage the locking clip.
Step 3. Push the rear locking clip over the back edge of the tray.
Step 4. Slide the tray forward to engage both front and rear locking clips.

SFSP’s Basket Tray Systems enable fast and simple connections with limited need for tools. SFSP’s design allows
continuous airflow, and prevents the buildup of dust, contaminants and bacterial proliferation. Strong, flexible
and adaptable, SFSP’s Basket Trays come in a full range of sizes and is made with high-strength welded steel
wires. Support accessories for any application or situation are available.
Basket Tray is produced by first welding a net, forming the channel and then finishing after fabrication.

148
BASKET TRAYS, SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Classification DIN VDE 0639

Temperature class:
–45° up to 150° C

Corrosive and harmful influences:


Medium resistance
High resistance
Solar radiation high resistance

11 16
4
15

12
2 3

1 9

13

7
4 5

6
8

14

10 17
1

1 Basket tray 10 Suspension profile


2 90° bend 11 Central suspension hanger
3 Joint connector 12 Stand off bracket
4 Quick connector 13 Central road hanger
5 Corner connector 14 Wall Bracket
6 Clamp 15 Thread Rod Hanger
7 Barrier strip 16 Thread Rod
8 Wall mounting 17 Bracket
9 Ceiling angle

149
BASKET TRAYS
Height: 55 mm, 80 mm, 105 mm and 150 mm.
Materials: Stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized to DIN EN ISO 1461
Wire Ø: 4mm
Basket Trays and accessories are also available in other dimensions and additional plastic coating upon
request.

BT 55 | Height 55 mm

Width (mm) (kg/m)


3000 w 50 0.61
100 0.76
150 1.01
55
55 200 1.32
300 1.99

W 400 2.97
50 100
450 3.17
500 3.37
Order Example: 600 3.79
Item No - Length (l) - Width (w) - Material

BT 80 | Height 80 mm

Width (mm) (kg/m)


3000 w 100 0.90
200 1.50
300 2.30
80 80 400 2.60
500 2.90

W 600 3.62
50 100

Order Example:
Item No - Length (l) - Width (w) - Material

BT 105 | Height 105 mm

Width (mm) (kg/m)


3000 w 100 1.32
150 1.69
200 1.99
105
105 300 2.96
400 3.37
450 3.60
W 50 100
500 3.78
600 4.19
Order Example:
Item No - Length (l) - Width (w) - Material

150
BT 150 | Height 150 mm

Width (mm) (kg/m)


3000
w 200 3.10
300 3.50
400 3.90
150
150 450 4.10
500 4.40
600 5.00
W 50 100

Order Example:
Item No - Length (l) - Width (w) - Material

900 BENDS
Heights: 55 mm, 80 mm, 105 mm and 150 mm.
Widths: 50 - 600
Materials: steel, hot-dip galvanized to DIN EN ISO 1461

M104

151
900 HORIZONTAL BENDS
Order Example:
Item No - Length (l) - Width (w) - Material

Short Radius Long Radius

M105 M106

Straight Sections Vertical Inside & Outside Bends

M107 M108

Horizontal Tees (cross) Reducers - Central Reducers

M109 M110

Left & Right Reducers

M111

152
BRACKETS
Bracket | M112

120 Basket
Tray W L
Width (mm) (mm)
(mm)

175
27 150
100 145 50

245 150 195 100


200 245 150

60
300 345 200
M112 11 x 35

Width (mm): 145, 195, 245 and 345


Materials: Steel, hot-dip galvanized to DIN EN ISO 1461

Bracket | M113

Basket

32.5
11 x 35
Tray W L
Width (mm) (mm)
27 L
120
(mm)

100 145 50
20

W
150 195 100
200 245 150
60

300 345 200


M113

Width (mm): 145, 245 and 345


Materials: Steel, strip galvanized to DIN EN 10147

Spacer Bracket | M114

For floor-mounted Basket Trays and Cable Tray stands. Can also be used for wall mounting.

206
9x15
3
20
30
9

35 35
W + 70

Materials: Steel, strip galvanized to DIN EN 10147

M114
153
STAND OFF BRACKET
Base holder for Basket Tray with mesh 50 mm x 100 mm and suspension

7 x 25
7 x 15 9x1 5

30
40
W
W+ 60
M115

Widths (mm): 100, 150, 200, 300 and 400


Materials: S teel, strip galvanized to DIN EN 10147

MOUNTING BRACKET
Connectors, for production of bends and Basket Trays Steel strip galvanized to DIN EN 10147

450 Mounting Bracket

178

103

M116

Materials: Steel strip galvanized to DIN EN 10147

154
MOUNTING BRACKET
900 Mounting Bracket

170
230

M117

Materials: Steel strip galvanized to DIN EN 10147

Wall Mounting

11 x 16 15
50
26

50 5
M118

Materials: Steel strip galvanized to DIN EN 10147

155
MOUNTING BRACKET
Suspension Profile

For connection between ceiling angle and base holder

Length : 3000 mm

10
45

51
8.3 x 35

M119

Materials: Steel strip galvanized to DIN EN 10147

CENTRAL HANGER
Suspension Profile Type

Base holder for Basket Trays

30

9
25

50
55
9

58
M120

Materials: Hot-dip galvanized steel to DIN EN ISO 1461

156
CENTRAL HANGER
Threaded Rod Hanger

For mounting of suspension profiles using a threaded rod

170
230

M121

CONNECTORS
Quick Connector
10.45
1.45

CN101 L

Materials: Hot-dip galvanized steel to DIN EN ISO 1461

157
M121
CONNECTORS
Corner Connector

Truss-head bolt 

42–54

23

CN102

Materials: Hot-dip galvanized steel to DIN EN ISO 1461

Joint Connector

Complete with 1 bolt

34
28

CN103

Materials: Hot-dip galvanized steel to DIN EN ISO 1461

158
CLAMPS
For barrier strip mounting in Basket Tray 

24

7
38
CL100

Materials: Hot-dip galvanized steel to DIN EN ISO 1461

For mounting Basket Tray to wall or support brackets

34
22

CN200

Materials: Hot-dip galvanized steel to DIN EN ISO 1461

159
CLAMPS
For mounting Basket Tray to wall or support brackets

35

2
24.5

20
17
23
M6

CL300

Materials: Hot-dip galvanized steel to DIN EN ISO 1461

For mounting Basket Trays on the floor or on stand off brackets

10.45
1.45

CN400 L

Materials: Hot-dip galvanized steel to DIN EN ISO 1461

Under - Floor Stand


• No hardware required to mount wire basket to Basket
bracket. Tray W L
• Simply bend tabs down around wires using a Width (mm) (mm)
(mm)
screwdriver.
100 145 50
150 195 100
200 245 150
300 345 200

M122

Materials: Hot-dip galvanized steel to DIN EN ISO 1461


Order Example: Item No - Length (l) - Width (w) - Material

160
Drop-Out Fitting
•Keeps cable radius secure at drop
point
•For use with 4” (100 mm) to 24”
(600 mm) wide trays
•Attaches to tray without hardware
•Drop - outs can be attached at
bottom, side or ends of tray

M123

Cover
Order Example:
Item No - Length (l) - Width (w) -
Material

Materials: Hot-dip galvanized steel to


DIN EN ISO 1461

M124

Barrier
• Separates cables.
Barrier Kit
• Furnished with barrier kit (includes
hardware).
• Length: 3000 mm

Order Example:
Item No - Length (l) - Width (w) -
Material

Materials: Hot-dip galvanized steel to


DIN EN ISO 1461 M125

Ceiling Angle
Materials: :
8.5 x 25
Steel strip galvanized to DIN EN
10147
Hot-dip galvanized Steel to DIN EN
ISO 1461
52

52 40
M126

161
INSTALLATION EXAMPLES

Ceiling suspension with vertical stages


90o bend by cutting the side wires Barrier strip on mesh cable tray

Support spacing Normal support spac- Support spacing for wall mounting
Straight connection of mesh cable trays ing 1.5 m Normal support spacing 1.5 m

Wall mounting

Ceiling mounting with ceiling


Only up to cable tray width 200 mm angle, suspension profile and
Bracket mounting Normal support spacing max. 1.5 m central suspension hanger

Mounting ceiling angle on


suspension profile Base holder on suspension Wall bracket mounting

162
Making a horizontal bend using
Straight connection of C mesh Mounting C mesh cable tray on corner connectors Separation of
cable trays bracket base wires and inner side wires

Fixing 45o mounting bracket to C Fixing 90o mounting bracket to


mesh tray C mesh tray Centre suspension

Floor mounting Mesh tray stands

Boltless mesh tray mounting

163
ACCESSORIES
CONNECTORS

Straight connector / 1000

Order Example
Cable Trays

Item (h) (t)

1000 050 2

1000 100 2

Order Example:
1000 - Side height (h) - Thickness
(t)
1000 For more ordering details, please
check page 100

Straight connector / 1000 - 1000 R

Order Example
Cable Ladders

TRUE R 4.5

Item (h) (t)

1000 050 2

h 1000 100 2
H

175 17
5
Order Example:
1000 - Side height (h) - Thickness
(t)
1000 1000R For more ordering details, please
check page 100

Angle connector / 1010 - 1020

Order Example
Width
(mm)
Cable Trays

Item )h( (w) )t(

20 1010 050 0020 2

50 1020 050 0050 2

Order Example:
1010/1020 - Side height (h) -
Thickness (t)
1010 1020 For more ordering details, please
check page 100

Straight connector / 1000 - 1000 R


Cable Ladders

TRUE R 4.5

h
H

175
17
5
Order Example:
20
1010 - Side height (h) - Thickness
20 (t)
1010 1010R For more ordering details, please
check page 100

166
Adjustable Vertical Connector 1030 / 1030 R

Order Example

Item (h) (t)


T T
0 0
10 10 1030 050 2

1030 100 2

Order Example:

H
H

1030 - Side height (h) - Thickness


(t)
1030 1030R For more ordering details, please
check page 100

Adjustable Horizontal Connector 1040 / 1040 R

Order Example
Cable Ladders

Item (h) (t)

1040 050 2

H
1040R 100 2
h

Order Example:
175 5
17

20 1040/1040R - Side height (h) -


20
Thickness (t)
1040 1040R For more ordering details, please
check page 100

Wrap-over connector / 1050 Wrap-over connector / 1060


Cable Trays

150

240

-Available with different side height types. 1050 1060

Barrier Strip 1070

For Cable Trays For Cable Ladders

1070 Available Lengths: 2440 / 3000 mm Available Lengths: 2440 / 3000 mm

167
CONNECTORS

Joint plate / Fish plate / 1080 End plate / 1100


Cable Trays

Width = width of tray minus 7 mm 1080 1010

Drop-out plate / 1110

For Cable Trays For Cable Ladders

1110

Cable Tie / 1120

For Cable Trays For Cable Ladders

Nylon ties provide easy attachment of


Ladder Cable Tray rungs

1120 1120

168
U Connector / Stop End Flanged Connector

ASC 9020 AFC 9025

Clamp for Vertical Assembly Stirrup Hanger

w (mm) : 50 ,100,150 ,200


ACV 9028
Cable Trunking

ASH 9030

Reference Dimensions
1.5 mm 2.0 mm mm
40
ASH 9030 4 AR 9030 020 0020 5 2x2
40
ASH 9030 4 AR 9030 030 0020 5 3x2
w 48
ASH 9030 4 AR 9030 030 0020 5 3x3
ASH 9030 4 AR 9030 040 0020 5 4x2
ASH 9030 4 AR 9030 040 0020 5 4x3
ASH 9030 4 AR 9030 040 0020 5 4x4
*Other dimensions are available upon request.

Suspension Bracket Straight Connector

With brass & steel lock nuts - 50 x 50 mm


- 75 x 75 mm

ASB 9035 ACR 9040

169
CONNECTORS

 rimping Type Copper


C Bonding Jumper / 1300
Tubular Cable Terminal Ends / 1200

G H B

D E C

Cable Stud
A Dimensions (mm) A Threaded Rod Dimensions (mm)
mm2 Hole Size mm 2
Current Rating AMP
A C D G
B BH B
Nut J J E1 E2
1.5 6.5
C 1.8 3.7 10 4 6 6 18 50 6 6 50
2.5
6.5 2.4 4 10 5 C6 Hanger
8 21
4
100 6 6 50
8.4 2.4 4.2 12 6 9 8 26 150 6 6 50
4
6.5 3.1 4.8 10 5 D6 Washer
8 21 200 6 6 50
D
8.4 3.1 5.0 12 6 9 8 26 50 6 6 90
6.5 3.8 5.5 10 5 6 10 24 100 6 6 90
6 10
8.4 3.8 5.5 12 6 9 10 28 150 6 6 90
6.5 4.5 6.2 11 6 7 10 26 200 6 6 90
10
8.4 4.5 6.2 12 6 9 10 28 100 8.5 8.5 125
6.5 5.4 7.1 12 7 7 12 30 150 8.5 8.5 125
16 16 200 8.5 8.5 125
8.4 5.4 7.1 12 7 7 12 30
20 8.4 6 7.7 12 7 7 12 32 250 8.5 8.5 125
6.5 6.8 8.8 13 7 7 12 30 300 8.5 8.5 125
25 100 10 10 160
8.4 6.8 8.8 13 7 7 12 30
150 10 10 160
25 200 10 10 160
250 10 10 160
300 10 10 160

Cover
Trunking Lid
Self Tapping
Screw

Screw, Nut
Trunking Body and Washer
Earth Wire
J
Green / Yellow

170
Functions
Ladder Cable Tray covers shall be considered for any of the following purposes:
• Protection from falling objects or debris, as may occur beneath personnel walkways.
• Shielding from ultraviolet rays of the sun and guarding against other weathering elements.
• Minimizing accumulation of foreign contaminants such as ash or other industrial deposits.
• Protection of cables and personnel where a riser tray penetrates a floor or grating.

COVERS
Solid Cover 2000 Ventilated Cover 2010

Covers Side Height Types :


• Solid without flange - (SOF)
• Solid with flange - (SWF)
• Ventilated without flange - (VOF)
2000 • Ventilated with flange - (VWF) 2100

SFSP
Order Example • Cable covers are supplied with or without a 15 mm down turned flange.
Width
)mm(
Item Type (W) )t( • Straight section covers are furnished 3000 mm long. All fitting covers are
2000 SWF 050 2 50
furnished in solid design only.

Order Example:
2000 - Type - Width (w) - Thickness (t)
for more ordering details, please check page 100

Ladder Cable Tray Covers with Locking Cable tray cover with locking clamp / 2100
Clamp 2100 

2100 2100

Covers’ Side Height Types :


• Solid without flange - (VOF)
• Solid with flange - (VWF)
Locking clamp
Order Example Thickness: 2mm
Width
)mm( Item (W) )t(
50 2100 050 2

Order Example:
2100 - Type - Width (w) - Thickness (t)
for more ordering details, please check page 100

171
C - CHANNEL
SYSTEMS
(STRUT SYSTEMS)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Channel
SFSP’s metal framing channel is cold formed on modern rolling machines from low carbon steel
manufactured according to BS 6946:1988. A continuous slot provides the ability to make attachments
at any point.

Lengths
Standard length: 3000mm with ± 3.2mm length tolerance.
Custom lengths are available upon request.

Finishes
Standard Finishes: Pre-Galvanized finish (ASTM A653M coating G90 and G60). Hot Dip Galvanized
after fabrication (ASTM A123 or BSEN ISO1461:2009) . Other custom coatings are available upon
request.

174
Z Z
Z
Y Y 41.0 Y Y
Y 21.0 Z Y Y Y
21.0 Y Y 41.0 Y Y
21.0 41.0
Y Y 41.0 Y Y
21.0
Z
Z 41.0 Z
41.0 Z
41.0 Z
Z Z
41.0
Metal Framing Channels 41.0 41.0
Z 41.0

41.0

Selection Chart 22.0 22.0


22.0
22.0
22.0
22.0 7.0
7.0 22.0 7.0
7.0
22.0 7.0
Channel Dimensions 21.0
7.0
7.0
Part No Thickness
21.0
21.0 7.0
41.0
Height “H” Width “W” 41.0
41.0
21.0
CCH - 220/221 21.0 mm 41.0 mm 1.5 mm 41.0 41.0
41.0
41.0
CCH - 240/241 41.0 mm 41.0 mm 1.5 mm 41.0
41.0
41.0
41.0
CCH - 320/321 21.0 mm 41.0 mm 2.0 mm
41.0
22.0
CCH - 340/341 41.0 mm 41.0 mm 2.0 mm 22.0
22.0
22.0
22.0 7.0
CCH - 420/421 21.0 mm 41.0 mm 2.5 mm 22.0
22.0 7.0
7.0
7.0
22.0 7.0
CCH - 440/441 41.0 mm 41.0 mm 2.5 mm 7.0
7.0
7.0
42.0
42.0
42.0

42.0 82.0
82.0
82.0

82.0
41.0
41.0
41.0

41.0

41.0
41.0
41.0

41.0

13
13 50
13
50
50 30
13 30 30
50
30

For Toothed Channel


add “T” after the Part
CCH 320 3 2 0 T
no. ex: CCH-220T
Material Thickness Size Channel Patterns Toothed
for 1.5 mm 2 mm 21/41 - 2 PT - 0 channel
for 2.0 mm 3 mm 41/41 - 4 ST - 1
for 2.5 mm 4 B2B - 2

Channel Hole Patterns

PT PLAIN ST SLOTTED B2B TOOTHED CHANNEL


TYPE TYPE TYPE TYPE

Thick. Height Thick. Height Thick. Height


Part No Part No Part No
mm. “H” mm. “H” mm. “H”
CCH-220 1.5 21.0 CCH-221 1.5 21.0 CCH-222 1.5 42.0
CCH-240 1.5 41.0 CCH-241 1.5 41.0 CCH-242 1.5 82.0
CCH-320 2.0 21.0 CCH-321 2.0 21.0 CCH-322 2.0 42.0
CCH-340 2.0 41.0 CCH-341 2.0 41.0 CCH-342 2.0 82.0
CCH-420 2.5 21.0 CCH-421 2.5 21.0 CCH-422 2.5 42.0
CCH-440 2.5 41.0 CCH-441 2.5 41.0 CCH-442 2.5 82.0

For Toothed Channel add “T” after the Part no. ex: CCH-220T
175
TECHNICAL DATA
Load and Support Condition Load Factor Deflection Factor

q
Simple Beam - Uniform Load 1.00 1.00
span

Beam Fixed at Both Ends - Uni-


1.50 0.30
form Load

Cantilever Beam - Uniform Load 0.25 2.40

Continuous Beam - Two Equal


Spans - Uniform Load on One 1.30 0.92
Span span span

Continuous Beam - Two Equal


Spans
1.00 0.42
- Concentrated Load on Both
Spans

Example

Problem Item Solution


Calculate the maximum allowable From beam load chart for CCH ,
load and corresponding deflection q maximum allowable load is q and
of a cantilever CCH beam with a the corresponding deflection is u.
uniformly distributed load Multiplying by the appropriate factors
shown in the chart above.
LOAD = q x load factor
DEFLECTION = u x deflection factor

176
Load and Support Condition Load Factor Deflection Factor

Simple Beam - Concentrated F 1.00 0.80


Load at Center

Simple Beam -Two Equal Con- F F 2 x 1.00 1.10


centrated Loads at 1/4 Points

Beam Fixed at Both Ends - Con-


2.00 0.40
centrated Load at Center

Cantilever Beam - Uniform Load 0.24 3.20

Continuous Beam - Two Equal


Spans
1.42 0.80
-Concentrated Load at Center
of One Span

Continuous Beam - Two Equal


Spans
2 x 1.34 0.50
-Concentrated Load at Center
of Both Spans

Example

Problem Item Solution


Calculate the maximum allowable From beam load chart for CCH ,
load and corresponding deflection of maximum allowable load is F and
the corresponding deflection is u.
a simply supported CCH beam with Multiplying by the appropriate factors
a concentrated load at mid span as shown in the chart above.
shown LOAD = F x load factor
span
DEFLECTION = u x deflection factor

177
CCH-220/221
Load table for single beam with uniform (characteristic) Live-Load
This data are for perforated C-Channel, same data will be considered for non-perforated C-Channel too
According to DIN 18.800

Thickness : 1.5 mm C-Channel: 41 x 21 x 1.5


Standard Length : 3.00 m Area of Shear (Az) 0.42 cm2
Finishes : Pre-Galvanized, Moment of Inertia (Iy) 0.70 cm4
Hot-Dip Galvanized. Moment of Inertia (Iz) 3.34 cm4
min. Section Modulus (Sy) 0.60 cm3
Warping Constant (Iw) 17.49 cm6
Torsional Constant (IT) 0.01 cm4
Plastic Moment cap. (Mpl,y) 0.19 kNm
Self weight (G) 0.97 kg/m

Chosen Material: 40 B = S 235 JRG2


CCH-221 Allowable Bending Stress 21,82 kN/cm2
Allowable Shear Stress 12,60 kN/cm2
Modulus of Elasticity 21.000 kN/cm2

Beam Load Data

Uniform Load* @
Span (L) Allowable Load* Deflection L / 360 L / 180
[cm] q [kN/m] F [kN] U [mm] [L /X] q [kN/m] q [kN/m]
50 2.20 0.60 1.52 330 2.00 2.20
60 1.60 0.50 2.30 260 1.20 1.60
70 1.10 0.39 2.92 240 0.73 1.14
80 0.90 0.36 4.08 200 0.49 0.87
90 0.69 0.31 5.01 180 0.34 0.69
100 0.56 0.28 6.20 160 0.25 0.50
125 0.36 0.23 9.73 130 x 0.26
150 0.25 0.19 14.01 110 x x
175 0.18 0.16 18.69 90 x x
200 x x x x x x
225 x x x x x x
250 x x x x x x
275 x x x x x x
300 x x x x x x

Allowable Load Allowable Uniform Load


F q
* Given loads are always “allowable
characteristic live load”
Span
Span

178
Beam Loading Graph CCH-220/221

Allowable Loads
KN/m ... KN

q [KN/m]
q F [KN]
F

Deflection @ Allowable Uniform Load


mm

q [KN/m]
q

Uniform Load @ Allowable Deflection


KN/m

q [KN/m]
q [KN/m]
L /180
L /360
L /360 L /180

179
Load table for single column with uniform (characteristic) Live-Load
This data are for perforated C-Channel, same data will be considered for non-perforated C-Channel too According to DIN
18.800

C-Channel: 41 x 21 x 1.5
Cross Section Area (A) 0.23 cm2
Moment of Inertia (Iy) 0.70 cm4
Moment of Inertia (Iz) 3.34 cm4
Self weight (G) 0.97 kg/m

Column Load Data

Span (L) Allowable Central Load** [KN]


[cm] Case A Case B Case C Case D
50 8.00 8.00 8.00 5.00
60 8.00 8.00 8.00 4.10
70 8.00 8.00 8.00 3.20
80 7.00 8.00 8.00 2.50
90 6.00 8.00 8.00 2.00
100 5.00 8.00 8.00 1.70
125 3.80 6.00 8.00 1.70
150 2.80 5.00 8.00 1.10
175 2.10 4.00 6.00 x
200 1.70 3.20 5.00 x
225 1.40 2.60 4.60 x
250 1.10 2.10 3.80 x
275 x 1.80 3.30 x
300 x 1.50 2.80 x

Allowable Central Load**

Case A
Case B
KN

Case C
Case D

* Given loads are always “allowable characteristic Alive load”

180
CCH-222
Load table for single beam with uniform (characteristic) Live-Load
This data are for perforated C-Channel, same data will be considered for non-perforated C-Channel too
According to DIN 18.800

Thickness : 1.5 mm C-Channel: 41x 21x1.5 b2b


Standard Length : 3.00 m Area of Shear (Az) 0.54 cm2
Finishes : Pre-Galvanized, Moment of Inertia (Iy) 3.55 cm4
Hot-Dip Galvanized. Moment of Inertia (Iz) 6.69 cm4
min. Section Modulus (Sy) 1.69 cm3
Warping Constant (Iw) 16.33 cm6
Torsional Constant (IT) 0.03 cm4
Plastic Moment cap. (Mpl,y) 0.50 kNm
Self weight (G) 1.94 kg/m
CCH-222
Chosen Material: 40 B = S 235 JRG2
Allowable Bending Stress 21,82 kN/cm2
Allowable Shear Stress 12,60 kN/cm2
Modulus of Elasticity 21.000 kN/cm2

Beam Load Data

Uniform Load* @
Span (L) Allowable Load* Deflection L / 360 L / 180
[cm] q [kN/m] F [kN] U [mm] [L /X] q [kN/m] q [kN/m]
50 6.30 1.60 0.86 580 6.30 6.30
60 4.40 1.30 1.24 480 4.40 4.40
70 3.20 1.10 1.68 420 3.20 3.20
80 2.50 1.00 2.24 360 2.50 2.50
90 1.90 0.90 2.72 330 1.70 1.90
100 1.60 0.80 3.49 290 1.30 1.60
125 1.00 0.60 5.33 230 0.70 1.00
150 0.70 0.50 7.74 190 0.40 0.70
175 0.51 0.40 10.44 170 0.20 0.50
200 0.39 0.39 13.62 150 x 0.32
225 0.31 0.35 17.35 130 x 0.22
250 0.25 0.31 21.32 120 x 0.16
275 0.21 0.29 26.22 100 x x
300 0.17 0.26 30.06 100 x x

Allowable Load Allowable Uniform Load


F q
* Given loads are always “allowable
characteristic live load”
Span
Span

181
Beam Loading Graph CCH-222

Allowable Loads
KN/m ... KN

q [KN/m]
q F [KN]
F

Deflection @ Allowable Uniform Load


mm

q [KN/m]
q

Uniform Load @ Allowable Deflection


KN/m

q [KN/m]
q [KN/m]
L /180
L /360
L /360 L /180

182
Load table for single beam with uniform (characteristic) Live-Load
This data are for perforated C-Channel, same data will be considered for non-perforated C-Channel too According to DIN
18.800

C-Channel: 41 x 21 x 1.5
Cross Section Area (A) 2.47 cm2

Moment of Inertia (Iy) 3.55 cm4


Moment of Inertia (Iz) 6.69 cm4
Self weight (G) 1.94 kg/m

Column Load Data

Span (L) Allowable Central Load** [KN]


[cm] Case A Case B Case C Case D
50 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00
60 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00
70 16.00 16.00 16.00 13.00
80 16.00 16.00 16.00 10.00
90 16.00 16.00 16.00 9.00
100 16.00 16.00 16.00 7.00
125 15.00 16.00 16.00 5.00
150 11.00 16.00 16.00 3.70
175 9.00 15.00 16.00 2.80
200 7.00 13.00 16.00 2.20
225 6.00 11.00 16.00 x
250 5.00 9.00 15.00 x
275 4.40 8.00 13.00 x
300 3.70 7.00 11.00 x

Allowable Central Load**

Case A
Case B
KN

Case C
Case D

* Given loads are always “allowable characteristic Alive load”

183
CCH-240/241
Load table for single beam with uniform (characteristic) Live-Load
This data are for perforated C-Channel, same data will be considered for non-perforated C-Channel too According
to DIN 18.800

Thickness : 1.5 mm C-Channel: 41x41x1.5


Standard Length : 3.00 m Area of Shear (Az) 1.02 cm2
Finishes : Pre-Galvanized, Moment of Inertia (Iy) 3.87 cm4
Hot-Dip Galvanized. Moment of Inertia (Iz) 5.68 cm4
min. Section Modulus (Sy) 1.76 cm3
Warping Constant (Iw) 114.17 cm6
Torsional Constant (IT) 0.02 cm4
Plastic Moment cap. (Mpl,y) 0.52 kNm
Self weight (G) 1.44 kg/m

CCH-240
Chosen Material: 40 B = S 235 JRG2
Allowable Bending Stress 21,82 kN/cm2
Allowable Shear Stress 12,60 kN/cm2
Modulus of Elasticity 21.000 kN/cm2

Beam Load Data

Uniform Load* @
Span (L) Allowable Load* Deflection L / 360 L / 180
[cm] q [kN/m] F [kN] U [mm] [L /X] q [kN/m] q [kN/m]
50 6.60 1.70 0.83 610 6.60 6.60
60 4.60 1.40 1.19 500 4.60 4.60
70 3.30 1.20 1.59 440 3.30 3.30
80 2.60 1.00 2.13 380 2.60 2.60
90 2.00 0.90 2.63 340 1.90 2.00
100 1.60 0.80 3.20 310 1.40 1.60
125 1.00 0.60 4.89 260 0.70 1.00
150 0.73 0.50 7.40 200 0.40 0.70
175 0.53 0.50 9.96 180 0.30 0.50
200 0.41 0.40 13.14 150 0.20 0.30
225 0.32 0.36 16.42 140 x 0.24
250 0.26 0.33 20.34 120 x 0.18
275 0.22 0.30 25.20 110 x x
300 0.18 0.27 29.20 100 x x

Allowable Load Allowable Uniform Load


F q
* Given loads are always “allowable
characteristic live load”
Span
Span

184
Beam Loading Graph CCH-240/241

Allowable Loads
KN/m ... KN

q [KN/m]
q F [KN]
F

Deflection @ Allowable Uniform Load


mm

q [KN/m]
q

Uniform Load @ Allowable Deflection


KN/m

q [KN/m]
q [KN/m]
L /180
L /360
L /360 L /180

185
Load table for single beam with uniform (characteristic) Live-Load
This data are for perforated C-Channel, same data will be considered for non-perforated C-Channel too According to DIN
18.800

C-Channel: 41 x 41 x 1.5
Cross Section Area (A) 1.83 cm2

Moment of Inertia (Iy) 3.87 cm4


Moment of Inertia (Iz) 5.68 cm4
Self weight (G) 1.44 kg/m

Column Load Data

Span (L) Allowable Central Load** [KN]


[cm] Case A Case B Case C Case D
50 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00
60 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00
70 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00
80 12.00 12.00 12.00 10.00
90 12.00 12.00 12.00 8.00
100 12.00 12.00 12.00 7.00
125 12.00 12.00 12.00 5.00
150 11.00 12.00 12.00 3.90
175 9.00 12.00 12.00 3.00
200 7.00 12.00 12.00 2.30
225 6.00 10.00 12.00 1.90
250 5.00 9.00 12.00 x
275 4.60 8.00 12.00 x
300 3.90 7.00 11.00 x

Allowable Central Load**

Case A
Case B
KN

Case C
Case D

* Given loads are always “allowable characteristic Alive load”

186
CCH-242
Load table for single beam with uniform (characteristic) Live-Load
This data are for perforated C-Channel, same data will be considered for non-perforated C-Channel too According
to DIN 18.800

Thickness : 1.5 mm C-Channel: 41x 41x1.5 b2b


Standard Length : 3.00 m Area of Shear (Az) 1.43 cm2
Finishes : Pre-Galvanized, Moment of Inertia (Iy) 21.11 cm4
Hot-Dip Galvanized. Moment of Inertia (Iz) 11.37 cm4
min. Section Modulus (Sy) 5.15 cm3
Warping Constant (Iw) 95.85 cm6
CCH-242 Torsional Constant (IT) 0.04 cm4
Plastic Moment cap. (Mpl,y) 1.53 kNm
Self weight (G) 2.88 kg/m

Chosen Material: 40 B = S 235 JRG2


Allowable Bending Stress 21,82 kN/cm2
Allowable Shear Stress 12,60 kN/cm2
Modulus of Elasticity 21.000 kN/cm2

Beam Load Data

Uniform Load* @
Span (L) Allowable Load* Deflection L / 360 L / 180
[cm] q [kN/m] F [kN] U [mm] [L /X] q [kN/m] q [kN/m]
50 19.20 4.80 0.44 1.130 19.20 19.20
60 13.30 4.00 0.63 950 13.30 13.30
70 9.80 3.40 0.86 810 9.80 9.80
80 7.50 3.00 1.13 710 7.50 7.50
90 5.90 2.70 1.42 630 5.90 5.90
100 4.80 2.40 1.76 570 4.80 4.80
125 3.10 1.90 2.78 450 3.10 3.10
150 2.10 1.60 3.90 380 2.10 2.10
175 1.60 1.40 5.51 320 1.40 1.60
200 1.10 1.10 6.46 310 0.90 1.10
225 0.80 0.90 7.53 300 0.70 0.80
250 0.58 0.70 8.32 300 0.50 0.60
275 0.44 0.60 9.24 300 0.40 0.40
300 0.34 0.50 10.11 300 0.30 0.30

Allowable Load Allowable Uniform Load


F q
* Given loads are always “allowable
characteristic live load”
Span
Span

187
Beam Loading Graph CCH-242

Allowable Loads
KN/m ... KN

q [KN/m]
q F [KN]
F

Deflection @ Allowable Uniform Load


mm

q [KN/m]
q

Uniform Load @ Allowable Deflection


KN/m

q [KN/m]
q [KN/m]
L /180
L /360
L /360 L /180

188
Load table for single beam with uniform (characteristic) Live-Load
This data are for perforated C-Channel, same data will be considered for non-perforated C-Channel too According to DIN
18.800

C-Channel: 41 x 41 x 1.5 b2b


Cross Section Area (A) 3.67 cm2

Moment of Inertia (Iy) 21.11 cm4


Moment of Inertia (Iz) 11.37 cm4
Self weight (G) 2.88 kg/m

Column Load Data

Span (L) Allowable Central Load** [KN]


[cm] Case A Case B Case C Case D
50 24.00 24.00 24.00 24.00
60 24.00 24.00 24.00 24.00
70 24.00 24.00 24.00 24.00
80 24.00 24.00 24.00 24.00
90 24.00 24.00 24.00 23.00
100 24.00 24.00 24.00 20.00
125 24.00 24.00 24.00 14.00
150 24.00 24.00 24.00 10.00
175 24.00 24.00 24.00 8.00
200 20.00 24.00 24.00 6.00
225 17.00 24.00 24.00 5.00
250 14.00 24.00 24.00 4.40
275 12.00 21.00 24.00 3.70
300 10.00 19.00 24.00 x

Allowable Central Load**

Case A
Case B
KN

Case C
Case D

* Given loads are always “allowable characteristic Alive load”

189
CCH-320/321
Load table for single beam with uniform (characteristic) Live-Load
This data are for perforated C-Channel, same data will be considered for non-perforated C-Channel too According
to DIN 18.800

Thickness : 2.0 mm C-Channel: 41x41x1.5


Standard Length : 3.00 m Area of Shear (Az) 0.55 cm2
Finishes : Pre-Galvanized, Moment of Inertia (Iy) 0.88 cm4
Hot-Dip Galvanized. Moment of Inertia (Iz) 4.25 cm4
min. Section Modulus (Sy) 0.75 cm3
Warping Constant (Iw) 21.34 cm6
Torsional Constant (IT) 0.02 cm4
Plastic Moment cap. (Mpl,y) 0.24 kNm
Self weight (G) 1.27 kg/m

Chosen Material: 40 B = S 235 JRG2


CCH-320
Allowable Bending Stress 21,82 kN/cm2
Allowable Shear Stress 12,60 kN/cm2
Modulus of Elasticity 21.000 kN/cm2

Beam Load Data

Uniform Load* @
Span (L) Allowable Load* Deflection L / 360 L / 180
[cm] q [kN/m] F [kN] U [mm] [L /X] q [kN/m] q [kN/m]
50 2.80 0.70 1.54 320 2.50 2.80
60 1.90 0.60 2.17 280 1.50 1.90
70 1.40 0.50 2.96 240 0.90 1.40
80 1.10 0.40 3.97 200 0.60 1.10
90 0.90 0.41 5.20 170 0.43 0.86
100 0.70 0.35 6.17 160 0.32 0.63
125 0.45 0.28 9.68 130 0.16 0.32
150 0.31 0.23 13.82 110 x 0.19
175 0.23 0.20 19.00 90 x x
200 0.17 0.17 23.96 80 x x
225 x x x x x x
250 x x x x x x
275 x x x x x x
300 x x x x x x

Allowable Load Allowable Uniform Load


F q
* Given loads are always “allowable
characteristic live load”
Span
Span

190
Beam Loading Graph CCH-320/321

Allowable Loads
KN/m ... KN

q [KN/m]
q F [KN]
F

Deflection @ Allowable Uniform Load


mm

q [KN/m]
q

Uniform Load @ Allowable Deflection


KN/m

q [KN/m]
q [KN/m]
L /180
L /360
L /360 L /180

191
Load table for single beam with uniform (characteristic) Live-Load
This data are for perforated C-Channel, same data will be considered for non-perforated C-Channel too According to DIN
18.800

C-Channel: 41 x 41 x 1.5 b2b


Cross Section Area (A) 1.62 cm2

Moment of Inertia (Iy) 0.88 cm4


Moment of Inertia (Iz) 4.25 cm4
Self weight (G) 1.27 kg/m

Column Load Data

Span (L) Allowable Central Load** [KN]


[cm] Case A Case B Case C Case D
50 10.00 10.00 10.00 6.00
60 10.00 10.00 10.00 5.00
70 10.00 10.00 10.00 4.00
80 9.00 10.00 10.00 3.20
90 8.00 10.00 10.00 2.60
100 6.00 10.00 10.00 2.10
125 4.90 8.00 10.00 1.40
150 3.60 6.00 10.00 x
175 2.70 5.00 8.00 x
200 2.10 4.00 6.00 x
225 1.70 3.30 5.00 x
250 1.40 2.70 4.90 x
275 x 2.30 4.10 x
300 x 1.90 3.60 x

Allowable Central Load**

Case A
Case B
KN

Case C
Case D

* Given loads are always “allowable characteristic Alive load”

192
CCH-322
Load table for single beam with uniform (characteristic) Live-Load
This data are for perforated C-Channel, same data will be considered for non-perforated C-Channel too According
to DIN 18.800

Thickness : 1.5 mm C-Channel: 41x 41x1.5 b2b


Standard Length : 3.00 m Area of Shear (Az) 0.71 cm2
Finishes : Pre-Galvanized, Moment of Inertia (Iy) 4.60 cm4
Hot-Dip Galvanized. Moment of Inertia (Iz) 8.51 cm4
min. Section Modulus (Sy) 2.19 cm3
Warping Constant (Iw) 19.76 cm6
Torsional Constant (IT) 0.06 cm4
Plastic Moment cap. (Mpl,y) 0.66 kNm
Self weight (G) 2.54 kg/m
CCH-242

Chosen Material: 40 B = S 235 JRG2


Allowable Bending Stress 21,82 kN/cm2
Allowable Shear Stress 12,60 kN/cm2
Modulus of Elasticity 21.000 kN/cm2

Beam Load Data

Uniform Load* @
Span (L) Allowable Load* Deflection L / 360 L / 180
[cm] q [kN/m] F [kN] U [mm] [L /X] q [kN/m] q [kN/m]
50 8.20 2.10 0.86 580 8.20 8.20
60 5.70 1.70 1.24 480 5.70 5.70
70 4.20 1.50 1.70 410 4.20 4.20
80 3.20 1.30 2.21 360 3.20 3.20
90 2.50 1.10 2.76 330 2.30 2.50
100 2.00 1.00 3.37 300 1.60 2.00
125 1.30 0.80 5.35 230 0.80 1.30
150 0.90 0.70 7.68 200 0.50 0.90
175 0.67 0.60 10.59 170 0.30 0.60
200 0.51 0.50 13.75 150 0.20 0.40
225 0.40 0.50 17.27 130 x 0.30
250 0.33 0.40 21.72 120 x 0.20
275 0.27 0.37 26.02 110 x x
300 0.23 0.35 31.39 100 x x

Allowable Load Allowable Uniform Load


F q
* Given loads are always “allowable
characteristic live load”
Span
Span

193
Beam Loading Graph CCH-322

Allowable Loads
KN/m ... KN

q [KN/m]
q F [KN]
F

Deflection @ Allowable Uniform Load


mm

q [KN/m]
q

Uniform Load @ Allowable Deflection


KN/m

q [KN/m]
q [KN/m]
L /180
L /360
L /360 L /180

194
Load table for single beam with uniform (characteristic) Live-Load
This data are for perforated C-Channel, same data will be considered for non-perforated C-Channel too According to DIN
18.800

C-Channel: 41 x 21 x 2.0 b2b


Cross Section Area (A) 3.67 cm2
Moment of Inertia (Iy) 21.11 cm4
Moment of Inertia (Iz) 11.37 cm4
Self weight (G) 2.88 kg/m

Column Load Data

Span (L) Allowable Central Load** [KN]


[cm] Case A Case B Case C Case D
50 24.00 24.00 24.00 24.00
60 24.00 24.00 24.00 24.00
70 24.00 24.00 24.00 24.00
80 24.00 24.00 24.00 24.00
90 24.00 24.00 24.00 23.00
100 24.00 24.00 24.00 20.00
125 24.00 24.00 24.00 14.00
150 24.00 24.00 24.00 10.00
175 24.00 24.00 24.00 8.00
200 20.00 24.00 24.00 6.00
225 17.00 24.00 24.00 5.00
250 14.00 24.00 24.00 4.40
275 12.00 21.00 24.00 3.70
300 10.00 19.00 24.00 x

Allowable Central Load**

Case A
Case B
KN

Case C
Case D

* Given loads are always “allowable characteristic Alive load”

195
CCH-340/341
Load table for single beam with uniform (characteristic) Live-Load
This data are for perforated C-Channel, same data will be considered for non-perforated C-Channel too
According to DIN 18.800

Thickness : 2.0 mm C-Channel: 41 x 21 x 2.0


Standard Length : 3.00 m Area of Shear (Az) 1.34 cm2
Finishes : Pre-Galvanized, Moment of Inertia (Iy) 4.59 cm4
Hot-Dip Galvanized. Moment of Inertia (Iz) 6.99 cm4
min. Section Modulus (Sy) 2.18 cm3
Warping Constant (Iw) 138.49 cm6
Torsional Constant (IT) 0.03 cm4
Plastic Moment cap. (Mpl,y) 0.64 kNm
Self weight (G) 1.83 kg/m

CCH-320
Chosen Material: 40 B = S 235 JRG2
Allowable Bending Stress 21,82 kN/cm2
Allowable Shear Stress 12,60 kN/cm2
Modulus of Elasticity 21.000 kN/cm2

Beam Load Data

Uniform Load* @
Span (L) Allowable Load* Deflection L / 360 L / 180
[cm] q [kN/m] F [kN] U [mm] [L /X] q [kN/m] q [kN/m]
50 8.10 2.00 0.85 580 8.10 8.10
60 5.60 1.70 1.23 490 5.60 5.60
70 4.10 1.40 1.66 420 4.10 4.10
80 3.20 1.30 2.21 360 3.20 3.20
90 2.50 1.10 2.77 320 2.30 2.50
100 2.00 1.00 3.38 300 1.60 2.00
125 1.30 0.80 5.36 230 0.80 1.30
150 0.90 0.70 7.69 190 0.50 0.90
175 0.66 0.60 10.45 170 0.30 0.60
200 0.51 0.50 13.78 150 0.20 0.40
225 0.40 0.50 17.31 130 x 0.30
250 0.32 0.40 21.11 120 x 0.20
275 0.27 0.37 26.07 110 x x
300 0.23 0.35 31.46 100 x x

Allowable Load Allowable Uniform Load


F q
* Given loads are always “allowable
characteristic live load”
Span
Span

196
Beam Loading Graph CCH-340/341

Allowable Loads
KN/m ... KN

q [KN/m]
q F [KN]
F

Deflection @ Allowable Uniform Load


mm

q [KN/m]
q

Uniform Load @ Allowable Deflection


KN/m

q [KN/m]
q [KN/m]
L /180
L /360
L /360 L /180

197
Load table for single column with uniform (characteristic) Live-Load
This data are for perforated C-Channel, same data will be considered for non-perforated C-Channel too According to DIN
18.800

C-Channel: 41 x 41 x 1.5 b2b


Cross Section Area (A) 2.33 cm2

Moment of Inertia (Iy) 4.59 cm4


Moment of Inertia (Iz) 6.99 cm4
Self weight (G) 1.83 kg/m

Column Load Data

Span (L) Allowable Central Load** [KN]


[cm] Case A Case B Case C Case D
50 15.00 15.00 15.00 15.00
60 15.00 15.00 15.00 15.00
70 15.00 15.00 15.00 15.00
80 15.00 15.00 15.00 12.00
90 15.00 15.00 15.00 10.00
100 15.00 15.00 15.00 9.00
125 15.00 15.00 15.00 6.00
150 13.00 15.00 15.00 4.70
175 11.00 15.00 15.00 3.60
200 9.00 15.00 15.00 2.80
225 7.00 13.00 15.00 2.20
250 6.00 11.00 15.00 x
275 5.00 9.00 15.00 x
300 4.70 8.00 13.00 x

Allowable Central Load**

Case A
Case B
KN

Case C
Case D

* Given loads are always “allowable characteristic Alive load”

198
CCH-342
Load table for single beam with uniform (characteristic) Live-Load
This data are for perforated C-Channel, same data will be considered for non-perforated C-Channel too According
to DIN 18.800

Thickness : 2.0 mm C-Channel: 41x41x2.0 b2b


Standard Length : 3.00 m Area of Shear (Az) 1.88 cm2
Finishes : Pre-Galvanized, Moment of Inertia (Iy) 26.81 cm4
Hot-Dip Galvanized. Moment of Inertia (Iz) 14.04 cm4
min. Section Modulus (Sy) 6.62 cm3

CCH-342 Warping Constant (Iw) 113.65 cm6


Torsional Constant (IT) 0.08 cm4
Plastic Moment cap. (Mpl,y) 1.98 kNm
Self weight (G) 3.76 kg/m

Chosen Material: 40 B = S 235 JRG2


Allowable Bending Stress 21,82 kN/cm2
Allowable Shear Stress 12,60 kN/cm2
Modulus of Elasticity 21.000 kN/cm2

Beam Load Data

Uniform Load* @
Span (L) Allowable Load* Deflection L / 360 L / 180
[cm] q [kN/m] F [kN] U [mm] [L /X] q [kN/m] q [kN/m]
50 24.70 6.20 0.45 1.120 24.70 24.70
60 17.10 5.10 0.64 940 17.10 17.10
70 12.60 4.40 0.87 800 12.60 12.60
80 9.60 3.80 1.14 700 9.60 9.60
90 7.60 3.40 1.44 620 7.60 7.60
100 6.20 3.10 1.79 560 6.20 6.20
125 3.90 2.40 2.75 450 3.90 3.90
150 2.70 2.00 3.9 380 2.70 2.70
175 2.00 1.80 5.42 320 1.80 2.00
200 1.50 1.50 6.4 290 1.20 1.50
225 1.10 1.20 8.15 280 0.80 1.10
250 0.90 1.10 10.16 250 0.60 0.90
275 0.66 0.90 10.91 250 0.50 0.70
300 0.52 0.80 12.18 250 0.40 0.50

Allowable Load Allowable Uniform Load


F q
* Given loads are always “allowable
characteristic live load”
Span
Span

199
Beam Loading Graph CCH-342

Allowable Loads
KN/m ... KN

q [KN/m]
q F [KN]
F

Deflection @ Allowable Uniform Load


mm

q [KN/m]
q

Uniform Load @ Allowable Deflection


KN/m

q [KN/m]
q [KN/m]
L /180
L /360
L /360 L /180

200
Load table for single beam with uniform (characteristic) Live-Load
This data are for perforated C-Channel, same data will be considered for non-perforated C-Channel too According to DIN
18.800

C-Channel: 41 x 41 x 2.0 b2b


Cross Section Area (A) 4.79 cm2
Moment of Inertia (Iy) 26.81 cm4
Moment of Inertia (Iz) 14.04 cm4
Self weight (G) 3.76 kg/m

Column Load Data

Span (L) Allowable Central Load** [KN]


[cm] Case A Case B Case C Case D
50 31.00 31.00 31.00 31.00
60 31.00 31.00 31.00 31.00
70 31.00 31.00 31.00 31.00
80 31.00 31.00 31.00 31.00
90 31.00 31.00 31.00 29.00
100 31.00 31.00 31.00 25.00
125 31.00 31.00 31.00 18.00
150 31.00 31.00 31.00 13.00
175 30.00 31.00 31.00 10.00
200 25.00 31.00 31.00 8.00
225 21.00 31.00 31.00 6.00
250 18.00 30.00 31.00 5.00
275 15.00 26.00 31.00 4.60
300 13.00 23.00 31.00 x

Allowable Central Load**

Case A
Case B
KN

Case C
Case D

* Given loads are always “allowable characteristic Alive load”

201
CCH-420/421
Load table for single beam with uniform (characteristic) Live-Load
This data are for perforated C-Channel, same data will be considered for non-perforated C-Channel too According
to DIN 18.800

Thickness : 2.5 mm C-Channel: 41x 41x1.5 b2b


Standard Length : 3.00 m Area of Shear (Az) 0.67 cm2
Finishes : Pre-Galvanized, Moment of Inertia (Iy) 1.03 cm4
Hot-Dip Galvanized. Moment of Inertia (Iz) 5.07 cm4
min. Section Modulus (Sy) 0.89 cm3
Warping Constant (Iw) 24.24 cm6
Torsional Constant (IT) 0.06 cm4
Plastic Moment cap. (Mpl,y) 0.29 kNm
Self weight (G) 1.56 kg/m

Chosen Material: 40 B = S 235 JRG2


CCH-420
Allowable Bending Stress 21,82 kN/cm2
Allowable Shear Stress 12,60 kN/cm2
Modulus of Elasticity 21.000 kN/cm2

Beam Load Data

Uniform Load* @
Span (L) Allowable Load* Deflection L / 360 L / 180
[cm] q [kN/m] F [kN] U [mm] [L /X] q [kN/m] q [kN/m]
50 3.30 0.80 1.55 320 3.00 3.30
60 2.30 0.70 2.24 270 1.70 2.30
70 1.70 0.60 3.07 230 1.10 1.70
80 1.30 0.50 4.01 200 0.70 1.30
90 1.00 0.50 4.94 180 0.50 1.00
100 0.80 0.40 6.02 170 0.40 0.70
125 0.53 0.33 9.74 130 0.19 0.38
150 0.37 0.28 14.09 110 x 0.22
175 0.27 0.24 19.05 90 x x
200 0.21 0.21 25.28 80 x x
225 0.16 0.28 30.86 70 x x
250 x x x x x x
275 x x x x x x
300 x x x x x x

Allowable Load Allowable Uniform Load


F q
* Given loads are always “allowable
characteristic live load”
Span
Span

202
Beam Loading Graph CCH-420/421

Allowable Loads
KN/m ... KN

q [KN/m]
q F [KN]
F

Deflection @ Allowable Uniform Load


mm

q [KN/m]
q

Uniform Load @ Allowable Deflection


KN/m

q [KN/m]
q [KN/m]
L /180
L /360
L /360 L /180

203
Load table for single column with uniform (characteristic) Live-Load
This data are for perforated C-Channel, same data will be considered for non-perforated C-Channel too According to DIN
18.800

C-Channel: 41 x 41 x 1.5 b2b


Cross Section Area (A) 1.99 cm2

Moment of Inertia (Iy) 1.03 cm4


Moment of Inertia (Iz) 5.07 cm4
Self weight (G) 1.56 kg/m

Column Load Data

Span (L) Allowable Central Load** [KN]


[cm] Case A Case B Case C Case D
50 13.00 13.00 13.00 8.00
60 13.00 13.00 13.00 6.00
70 13.00 13.00 13.00 4.70
80 11.00 13.00 13.00 3.70
90 9.00 13.00 13.00 3.00
100 8.00 13.00 13.00 2.50
125 5.00 10.00 13.00 x
150 4.20 7.00 12.00 x
175 3.20 5.00 10.00 x
200 2.50 4.70 8.00 x
225 2.00 3.80 6.00 x
250 x 3.20 5.00 x
275 x 2.70 4.90 x
300 x 2.30 4.20 x

Allowable Central Load**

Case A
Case B
KN

Case C
Case D

* Given loads are always “allowable characteristic Alive load”

204
Channel Load Capacity

Material & Finish Max.


Channel Cross Moment of Section
Allowable Bending capacity at span L
Weight Section inertia modulus
Loading

Y Z Y Z
max F F

Y Y
]L [m
X Z X Z L
max F
G A Iy Iz Wy Wz 0.50 m 1.00 m 1.50 m
[Kg/m] [cm2] [cm4] [cm4] [cm3] [cm3] [KN] ≤L [cm] F [KN]

CCH 41/21
Hot-dip Galvanized 2.12 2.70 2.02 5.85 1.65 2.96 5.7 21.0 2.7 1.1 0.5
Stainless Steel

CCH 41/
Hot-dip Galvanized 2.08 2.66 2.01 6.06 1.36 3.03 3.8 33.0 2.5 1.0 0.4
Stainless Steel

205
CCH-422
Load table for single beam with uniform (characteristic) Live-Load
This data are for perforated C-Channel, same data will be considered for non-perforated C-Channel too According
to DIN 18.800

Thickness : 2.0 mm C-Channel: 41x21x2.5 b2b


Standard Length : 3.00 m Area of Shear (Az) 0.88 cm2
Finishes : Pre-Galvanized, Moment of Inertia (Iy) 5.55 cm4
Hot-Dip Galvanized. Moment of Inertia (Iz) 10.14 cm4
min. Section Modulus (Sy) 2.65 cm3
Warping Constant (Iw) 22.30 cm6
Torsional Constant (IT) 0.12 cm4
Plastic Moment cap. (Mpl,y) 0.82 kNm
Self weight (G) 3.13 kg/m
CCH-422
Chosen Material: 40 B = S 235 JRG2
Allowable Bending Stress 21,82 kN/cm2
Allowable Shear Stress 12,60 kN/cm2
Modulus of Elasticity 21.000 kN/cm2

Beam Load Data

Uniform Load* @
Span (L) Allowable Load* Deflection L / 360 L / 180
[cm] q [kN/m] F [kN] U [mm] [L /X] q [kN/m] q [kN/m]
50 9.90 2.50 0.86 580 9.90 9.90
60 6.90 2.10 1.25 480 6.90 6.90
70 5.00 1.80 1.68 420 5.00 5.00
80 3.90 1.60 2.23 360 3.90 3.90
90 3.00 1.40 2.75 330 2.70 3.00
100 2.50 1.30 3.49 290 2.00 2.50
125 1.60 1.00 5.46 230 1.00 1.60
150 1.10 0.80 7.78 190 0.60 1.10
175 0.80 0.70 10.48 170 0.40 0.70
200 0.62 0.60 13.85 140 0.20 0.50
225 0.49 0.60 17.54 130 0.20 0.30
250 0.39 0.50 21.27 120 x 0.30
275 0.33 0.50 26.36 100 x 0.20
300 0.27 0.40 30.54 100 x x

Allowable Load Allowable Uniform Load


F q
* Given loads are always “allowable
characteristic live load”
Span
Span

206
Beam Loading Graph CCH-442

Allowable Loads
KN/m ... KN

q [KN/m]
q F [KN]
F

Deflection @ Allowable Uniform Load


mm

q [KN/m]
q

Uniform Load @ Allowable Deflection


KN/m

q [KN/m]
q [KN/m]
L /180
L /360
L /360 L /180

207
Load table for single column with uniform (characteristic) Live-Load
This data are for perforated C-Channel, same data will be considered for non-perforated C-Channel too According to DIN
18.800

C-Channel: 41 x 21 x 2.5 b2b


Cross Section Area (A) 3.39 cm2
Moment of Inertia (Iy) 5.55 cm4
Moment of Inertia (Iz) 10.14 cm4
Self weight (G) 3.13 kg/m

Column Load Data

Span (L) Allowable Central Load** [KN]


[cm] Case A Case B Case C Case D
50 26.00 26.00 26.00 26.00
60 26.00 26.00 26.00 25.00
70 26.00 26.00 26.00 20.00
80 26.00 26.00 26.00 17.00
90 26.00 26.00 26.00 14.00
100 26.00 26.00 26.00 11.00
125 24.00 26.00 26.00 8.00
150 18.00 26.00 26.00 5.00
175 14.00 24.00 26.00 4.40
200 11.00 20.00 26.00 3.50
225 9.00 17.00 26.00 x
250 8.00 14.00 24.00 x
275 6.00 12.00 21.00 x
300 5.00 11.00 18.00 x

Allowable Central Load**

Case A
Case B
KN

Case C
Case D

* Given loads are always “allowable characteristic Alive load”

208
CCH-440/441
Load table for single beam with uniform (characteristic) Live-Load
This data are for perforated C-Channel, same data will be considered for non-perforated C-Channel too According
to DIN 18.800

Thickness : 2.5 mm C-Channel: 41x41x2.5


Standard Length : 3.00 m Area of Shear (Az) 1.67 cm2
Finishes : Pre-Galvanized, Moment of Inertia (Iy) 5.87 cm4
Hot-Dip Galvanized. Moment of Inertia (Iz) 8.76 cm4
min. Section Modulus (Sy) 2.72 cm3
Warping Constant (Iw) 171.52 cm6
Torsional Constant (IT) 0.07 cm4
Plastic Moment cap. (Mpl,y) 0.82 kNm
Self weight (G) 2.32 kg/m

CCH-440
Chosen Material: 40 B = S 235 JRG2
Allowable Bending Stress 21,82 kN/cm2
Allowable Shear Stress 12,60 kN/cm2
Modulus of Elasticity 21.000 kN/cm2

Beam Load Data

Uniform Load* @
Span (L) Allowable Load* Deflection L / 360 L / 180
[cm] q [kN/m] F [kN] U [mm] [L /X] q [kN/m] q [kN/m]
50 10.10 2.50 0.83 600 10.10 10.10
60 7.00 2.10 1.20 500 7.00 7.00
70 5.20 1.80 1.65 420 5.20 5.20
80 4.00 1.60 2.16 370 4.00 4.00
90 3.10 1.40 2.69 340 2.90 3.10
100 2.50 1.30 3.30 300 2.10 2.50
125 1.60 1.00 5.16 240 1.10 1.60
150 1.10 0.80 7.35 200 0.60 1.10
175 0.80 0.70 9.91 180 0.40 0.80
200 0.63 0.60 13.31 150 0.30 0.50
225 0.50 0.60 16.92 130 0.20 0.40
250 0.41 0.50 21.15 120 x 0.30
275 0.33 0.50 24.92 110 x 0.20
300 0.28 0.40 29.95 100 x x

Allowable Load Allowable Uniform Load


F q
* Given loads are always “allowable
characteristic live load”
Span
Span

209
Beam Loading Graph CCH-440/441

Allowable Loads
KN/m ... KN

q [KN/m]
q F [KN]
F

Deflection @ Allowable Uniform Load


mm

q [KN/m]
q

Uniform Load @ Allowable Deflection


KN/m

q [KN/m]
q [KN/m]
L /180
L /360
L /360 L /180

210
Load table for single beam with uniform (characteristic) Live-Load
This data are for perforated C-Channel, same data will be considered for non-perforated C-Channel too According to DIN
18.800

C-Channel: 41 x 41 x 1.5 b2b


Cross Section Area (A) 2.95 cm2

Moment of Inertia (Iy) 5.87 cm4


Moment of Inertia (Iz) 8.76 cm4
Self weight (G) 2.32 kg/m

Column Load Data

Span (L) Allowable Central Load** [KN]


[cm] Case A Case B Case C Case D
50 19.00 19.00 19.00 19.00
60 19.00 19.00 19.00 19.00
70 19.00 19.00 19.00 19.00
80 19.00 19.00 19.00 16.00
90 19.00 19.00 19.00 13.00
100 19.00 19.00 19.00 11.00
125 19.00 19.00 19.00 8.00
150 17.00 19.00 19.00 5.00
175 14.00 19.00 19.00 4.50
200 11.00 19.00 19.00 3.60
225 9.00 16.00 19.00 2.90
250 8.00 14.00 19.00 x
275 6.00 12.00 19.00 x
300 5.00 10.00 17.00 x

Allowable Central Load**

Case A
Case B
KN

Case C
Case D

* Given loads are always “allowable characteristic Alive load”

211
Channel Load Capacity

Material & Finish Max.


Channel Cross Moment of Section
Allowable Bending capacity at span L
Weight Section inertia modulus
Loading

Y Z Y Z
max F F

Y Y
]L [m
X Z X Z L
max F
G A Iy Iz Wy Wz 0.50 m 1.00 m 1.50 m
[Kg/m] [cm2] [cm4] [cm4] [cm3] [cm3] [KN] ≤L [cm] F [KN]

CCH 41/41
Hot-dip Galvanized 2.61 3.33 7.16 9.22 3.06 4.46 5.6 58.0 5.4 2.7 1.7
Stainless Steel

CCH 41/ 41
Hot-dip Galvanized 2.46 2.98 6.07 9.16 2.84 4.43 5.6 42.0 4.7 2.3 1.4
Stainless Steel

CCH 41/ 41 B2B


Hot-dip Galvanized 5.23 6.67 35.81 18.44 8.67 8.93 5.6 132.0 14.9 7.4 4.9
Stainless Steel

212
CCH-442
Load table for single beam with uniform (characteristic) Live-Load
This data are for perforated C-Channel, same data will be considered for non-perforated C-Channel too According
to DIN 18.800

Thickness : 2.5 mm C-Channel: 41x21x2.5 b2b


Standard Length : 3.00 m Area of Shear (Az) 2.37 cm2
Finishes : Pre-Galvanized, Moment of Inertia (Iy) 34.08 cm4
Hot-Dip Galvanized. Moment of Inertia (Iz) 17.56 cm4
min. Section Modulus (Sy) 8.31 cm3

CCH-422 Warping Constant (Iw) 140.95 cm6


Torsional Constant (IT) 0.16 cm4
Plastic Moment cap. (Mpl,y) 2.51 kNm
Self weight (G) 4.70 kg/m

Chosen Material: 40 B = S 235 JRG2


Allowable Bending Stress 21,82 kN/cm2
Allowable Shear Stress 12,60 kN/cm2
Modulus of Elasticity 21.000 kN/cm2

Beam Load Data

Uniform Load* @
Span (L) Allowable Load* Deflection L / 360 L / 180
[cm] q [kN/m] F [kN] U [mm] [L /X] q [kN/m] q [kN/m]
50 30.90 7.70 0.44 1.140 30.90 30.90
60 21.50 6.50 0.63 950 21.50 21.50
70 15.80 5.50 0.86 810 15.80 15.80
80 12.10 4.80 1.13 710 12.10 12.10
90 9.60 4.30 1.43 630 9.60 9.60
100 7.70 3.90 1.75 570 7.70 7.70
125 5.00 3.10 2.78 450 5.00 5.00
150 3.40 2.60 3.91 380 3.40 3.40
175 2.50 2.20 5.33 330 2.30 2.50
200 1.90 1.90 6.91 290 1.50 1.90
225 1.50 1.70 8.74 260 1.10 1.50
250 1.20 1.50 10.66 230 0.80 1.20
275 1.00 1.40 13.01 210 0.60 1.00
300 0.77 1.20 14.18 210 0.50 0.80

Allowable Load Allowable Uniform Load


F q
* Given loads are always “allowable
characteristic live load”
Span
Span

213
Beam Loading Graph CCH-442

Allowable Loads
KN/m ... KN

q [KN/m]
q F [KN]
F

Deflection @ Allowable Uniform Load


mm

q [KN/m]
q

Uniform Load @ Allowable Deflection


KN/m

q [KN/m]
q [KN/m]
L /180
L /360
L /360 L /180

214
Load table for single beam with uniform (characteristic) Live-Load
This data are for perforated C-Channel, same data will be considered for non-perforated C-Channel too According to DIN
18.800

C-Channel: 41 x 21 x 2.5 b2b


Cross Section Area (A) 5.99 cm2

Moment of Inertia (Iy) 34.08 cm4


Moment of Inertia (Iz) 17.56 cm4
Self weight (G) 4.70 kg/m

Column Load Data

Span (L) Allowable Central Load** [KN]


[cm] Case A Case B Case C Case D
50 39.00 39.00 39.00 39.00
60 39.00 39.00 39.00 39.00
70 39.00 39.00 39.00 39.00
80 39.00 39.00 39.00 39.00
90 39.00 39.00 39.00 36.00
100 39.00 39.00 39.00 31.00
125 39.00 39.00 39.00 22.00
150 39.00 39.00 39.00 17.00
175 37.00 39.00 39.00 13.00
200 31.00 39.00 39.00 10.00
225 26.00 39.00 39.00 8.00
250 22.00 37.00 39.00 6.00
275 19.00 33.00 39.00 5.00
300 17.00 29.00 39.00 x

Allowable Central Load**

Case A
Case B
KN

Case C
Case D

* Given loads are always “allowable characteristic Alive load”

215
TOOTHED CHANNEL
Toothed channels provide shock-resistant fixing for non-slip connections and higher safety requirements.
To make fitting easier, the locking plates and T-head bolts should be pre-mounted on the fittings to be
attached.

CCH-220T/221T (41x21x1.5)

Thickness : 2.5 mm
Standard Length : 3.00 m
Finishes : Pre-Galvanized,
Hot-Dip Galvanized.

CCH - 220T CCH - 221T CCH - 222T

Bending capacity at span L


Y Z
Max.
tensile /
F
transverse
load
Y ]L [m
X Z FZ FQ

Channel Cross
Moment of inertia Section modulus Bending capacity at span L
Channel Weight Section
G A Iy Iz Wy Wz 0.50 m 1.00 m 1.50 m
CCH
[Kg/m] [cm ]2
[cm ] 4
[cm ] 4
[cm ]
3
[cm ]
3
F [KN]
220T 1.09 1.39 0.81 3.36 0.64 1.91 1.12 0.56 0.19
221T 0.97 1.23 0.70 3.34 0.60 1.70 1.04 0.52 0.17
222T 1.94 2.47 3.55 6.69 1.69 3.82 2.94 1.47 0.49

Due to its positive locking feature, this channel is ideally suited when increased loading capacities in longitudinal direction
are required.

216
CCH-240T/241T (41x41x1.5)

Thickness : 1.5 mm
Standard Length : 3.00 m
Finishes : Pre-Galvanized,
Hot-Dip Galvanized.

CCH - 240T CCH - 241T CCH - 242T

Bending capacity at span L


Y Z
Max.
tensile /
F
transverse
load
Y ]L [m
X Z
FZ FQ

Channel Cross Sec-


Moment of inertia Section modulus Bending capacity at span L
Channel Weight tion
G A Iy Iz Wy Wz 0.50 m 1.00 m 1.50 m
CCH
[Kg/m] [cm ]2
[cm ] 4
[cm ] 4
[cm ]
3
[cm ]
3
F [KN]
240T 1.56 1.99 4.36 5.70 1.86 2.99 3.24 1.62 1.08
241T 1.44 1.83 3.87 5.68 1.76 2.66 3.06 1.53 1.02
242T 2.88 3.67 21.11 11.37 5.15 5.98 8.98 4.49 2.90

Due to its positive locking feature, this channel is ideally suited when increased loading capacities in
longitudinal direction are required.

217
TOOTHED CHANNEL
Toothed channels provide shock-resistant fixing for non-slip connections and higher safety requirements.
To make fitting easier, the locking plates and T-head bolts should be pre-mounted on the fittings to be
attached.

CCH-320T/321T (41x21x2.0)

Thickness : 2.0 mm
Standard Length : 3.00 m
Finishes : Pre-Galvanized,
Hot-Dip Galvanized.

CCH - 320T CCH - 321T CCH - 322T

Bending capacity at span L


Y Z Max.
tensile /
F
transverse
load
Y ]L [m
X Z FZ FQ

Channel Cross Sec-


Moment of inertia Section modulus Bending capacity at span L
Channel Weight tion
G A Iy Iz Wy Wz 0.50 m 1.00 m 1.50 m
CCH
[Kg/m] [cm ]2
[cm ] 4
[cm ] 4
[cm ]
3
[cm ]
3
F [KN]
320T 1.44 1.83 0.99 4.77 0.84 2.37 1.46 0.73 0.24
321T 1.27 1.62 0.88 4.25 0.75 2.11 1.30 0.65 0.22
322T 2.54 3.24 4.60 8.51 2.19 4.74 3.80 1.91 1.27

Due to its positive locking feature, this channel is ideally suited when increased loading capacities in
longitudinal direction are required.

218
CCH-340T/341T (41x41x2.0)

Thickness : 2.0 mm
Standard Length : 3.00 m
Finishes : Pre-Galvanized,
Hot-Dip Galvanized.

CCH - 340T CCH - 341T CCH - 342T

Bending capacity at span L


Y Z
Max.
tensile /
F
transverse
load
Y ]L [m
X Z FZ FQ

Channel Cross Sec-


Moment of inertia Section modulus Bending capacity at span L
Channel Weight tion
G A Iy Iz Wy Wz 0.50 m 1.00 m 1.50 m
CCH
[Kg/m] [cm ]2
[cm ] 4
[cm ] 4
[cm ]
3
[cm ]
3
F [KN]
340T 2.04 2.60 5.41 7.03 2.35 3.86 4.10 2.05 1.37
341T 1.83 2.33 4.59 6.99 2.18 3.43 3.80 1.90 1.26
342T 3.76 4.79 26.81 14.04 6.62 7.72 11.54 5.77 3.85

Due to its positive locking feature, this channel is ideally suited when increased loading capacities in
longitudinal direction are required.

219
TOOTHED CHANNEL
Toothed channels provide shock-resistant fixing for non-slip connections and higher safety requirements.
To make fitting easier, the locking plates and T-head bolts should be pre-mounted on the fittings to be
attached.

CCH-420T/421T (41x21x2.5)

Thickness : 2.5 mm
Standard Length : 3.00 m
Finishes : Pre-Galvanized,
Hot-Dip Galvanized.

CCH - 220T CCH - 221T CCH - 222T

Bending capacity at span L


Y Z
Max.
tensile /
F
transverse
load
Y L [m]
X Z FZ FQ

Channel Cross Sec-


Moment of inertia Section modulus Bending capacity at span L
Channel Weight tion
G A Iy Iz Wy Wz 0.50 m 1.00 m 1.50 m
CCH
[Kg/m] [cm ]2
[cm ] 4
[cm ] 4
[cm ]
3
[cm ]
3
F [KN]
420T 1.75 2.18 1.15 4.92 0.89 2.50 1.55 0.78 0.32
421T 1.54 1.95 1.01 4.99 0.86 2.49 1.5 0.75 0.3
422T 3.50 4.48 5.55 10.15 2.63 5.31 4.58 2.29 1.53

Due to its positive locking feature, this channel is ideally suited when increased loading capacities in
longitudinal direction are required.

220
CCH-440T/441T (41x41x2.5)

Thickness : 2.5 mm
Standard Length : 3.00 m
Finishes : Pre-Galvanized,
Hot-Dip Galvanized.

CCH - 440T CCH - 441T CCH - 442T

Bending capacity at span L


Y Z
Max.
tensile /
F
transverse
load
Y L [m]
X Z FZ FQ

Channel Cross Sec-


Moment of inertia Section modulus Bending capacity at span L
Channel Weight tion
G A Iy Iz Wy Wz 0.50 m 1.00 m 1.50 m
CCH
[Kg/m] [cm ]2
[cm ] 4
[cm ] 4
[cm ]
3
[cm ]
3
F [KN]
440T 2.57 3.28 6.52 8.78 2.76 4.39 4.81 2.41 1.60
441T 2.30 2.91 5.62 8.74 2.57 4.35 4.48 2.24 1.49
442T 4.90 6.34 32.02 17.54 8.11 8.85 14.14 7.07 4.71

Due to its positive locking feature, this channel is ideally suited when increased loading capacities in
longitudinal direction are required.

221
FITTINGS
This part offers a full section of fittings and accessories to complete SFSP’s metal framing system .

Standard Finishes: Hot Dip Galvanized .


Fitting Specifications (unless noted) : Hole Size 13.0mm Diameter; Hole Spacing 20.0mm from end and 48.0 mm
on center; Width 41.0mm; Thickness , 6.0mm (Order hardware separately).

Flat

Square Plate 2 Holes 3 Holes 4 Holes


Specify Hole Size Plate Plate Plate
M6, M8, M10, M12
41
41

41
88 138 184

SFT 110 SFT 115 SFT 120 SFT 125

5 Holes L Bracket L Bracket Tee Bracket


90
Plate
90 138
232
138
90

138

SFT 130 SFT 135 SFT 140 SFT 145

Flat Bracket Flat Bracket 3 Holes


90 Swing
90 90

136

41
SFT 150 SFT 155 SFT 160

U Bracket
U Bracket Top Hat U Bracket
Specify 41 or 82

SFSP SFSP
54 43

43 for C41
23 82 for B2B

41
41 47
47

SFT 610 SFT 615

222
Angular

Angle Bracket Angle Bracket Specify 30° or


Specify 30° or 45° 45° or 60°
or 60°
S
S

h h
SFT 510 SFT 515

90˚ Degree

90° L Bracket 90° L Bracket 90° Long Bracket 90° Bracket

41
41
57 104
104 41
104 104

SFT 210 SFT 215 SFT 220 SFT 225

90° Bracket 90° Delta Bracket Large 90° Delta Bracket Small

89

42
47 47 47
138 98

41
SFT 230 SFT 235 SFT 240

- Standard Finishes : Black, Hot Dip Galvanized .


- Fitting Specifications (unless noted) : Hole Size 13.0mm Diameter; Hole Spacing 20.0mm from end and 48.0 mm on
center; Width 41.0mm; Thickness , 6.0mm (Order hardware separately).

Wings

90° Angle Tee Left Hand 90° Angle Tee Channel Tee Bracket
51

47 47

138 98

40
43
SFT 310 SFT 315 SFT 320

223
FITTINGS
Post Base

Base Plate with Single Fix

41

100
60

20
60
8 40
100
100 20 60 20 100
100

SFT 340

Base Plate with Double Fix

20
60
65

120

40
8
136 65

120

65

20
100

120

60
136

8 40
SFT 345
8

20 50 50 20
20 100 20
140
140

Base Plate with Double Channel


100

60

100
60

100
200
200

SFT 350

Base Plate with Double Channel Double Fix


20
100

100
40

100 100
40

200
8

200 200

SFT 355

224
CHANNEL NUTS

Nut without Spring Nut with Short Spring Nut with Long Spring Hammer Head Bolt

Material: Zinc plated steel and stainless steel 304 (A2),316 (A4).
Tolerance: Metric thread 6 H acc. DIN 13-20.

tt t tt t
20
20 20 Washer Ø 40

M
M M 3

length
0.18

0.18

0.18

0.18
34.5

34.5

t
LL FL
FF34.5
10
10 10 34
34 34
Short Spring Long Spring

Available length: L 30mm, 40mm, 50mm, 60mm.


Material: Zinc plated.

ALLOWABLE LOAD CAPACITIES FOR CHANNEL NUTS AND BOLTS


Mild Steel Channels, Bolt Material zinc plated or hot dip-galvanized
Pull out Longitudinal Tightening
Thread Size )Force Fv (kN )Force FL (kN )Torque (Nm
M6 5.0 1.0 12.0
M8 6.0 2.4 28.0
M10 7.0 3.5 55.0
M12 7.0 5.0 55.0

Stainless Steel Channels, Bolt Material Stainless steel A4


Pull out Longitudinal Tightening
Threaded Size )Force Fv (kN )Force FL (kN )Torque (Nm
M6 5.0 0.3 6.5
M8 6.0 0.6 16.0
FL
M10 7.0 1.2 31.5 Fv

M12 7.0 1.7 55.0

Note: Do not exceed channel capacity

ALLOWABLE LOAD CAPACITIES FOR TOOTHED CHANNEL NUTS AND BOLTS


Mild Steel Toothed Channels, Bolt Material zinc plated or hot dip-galvanized Stainless Steel Toothed Channels, Bolt Material Stainless steel A4
Longitudinal Tension Load Tightening Longitudinal Tension Load Tightening
Bolt Size Bolt Size
)Force FL (kN )(Fv )Torque (Nm )Force FL (kN )(Fv )Torque (Nm
M6 2.2 5.0 12 M6 2.2 5.0 6,5
M8 4.0 6.0 28 M8 4.0 6.0 16.0
M10 5.0 7.0 55 M10 5.0 7.0 31,5
M12 5.0 7.0 55 M12 5.0 7.0 55.0

225
INSTALLATION & FEATURES
No Welding , No Drilling , No Special Tools, Strong, Fast, Economical and Adjustable.

Insert the spring nut


anywhere along the
continuous slotted channel.
The rounded nut ends
permit easy insertion.

A 90° clockwise turn aligns


the grooves in the nut with
the in turned edges of Hex-head bolt connects
the channel. The need for fitting to channel as it
is threaded into spring
drilling holes is eliminated. nut.
Chamfer in the nut
eases starting of the
bolt. Nut teeth make
a strong, vise-like grip
3 when tightened against
the in turned channel
edges.
Insert the bolt through
Channel edges and the
the fitting and into the nut’s tapered grooves
springnut. (See illustration act as guides to provide
fool-proof alignment of
5 for end view showing the connection.
nut in place)
Nut teeth grip the
channel’s in turned
edges, tying the channel
sides together in a
4 “box” configuration for
added strength.
Additional channel sections Spring allows precision
can now be bolted to the placement anywhere
fitting already in place along channel length,
then holds the nut
by following procedure in position while
described in steps 1–3. the connection is
completed.

5
Tightening with a wrench
locks the serrated teeth of
the nut into the in turned
edges of the channel, to
complete a strong, vise-like
connection.

226
Beam Clamp - SBC

SBC

Material: Cast Iron ,hot dip galvanized casting tolerance according to DIN 1684- GTA /17.

- With hexagon head screw DIN 933 8.8, threaded end with cup point according to EN ISO 4753 and locknut

DIN 439 .

- For sprinkler systems, heating, ventilation and air conditioning, acoustic tubes

and sanitary installation machines and steel constructions.

Weight Safe working


A B C D E F G H
load
Type
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (g) (KN)

SBC8 21.0 19.0 35.0 M8 35.0 M8 18.0 38.0 81.0 1.2

SBC10 29.0 21.0 35.0 M8 41.0 M10 23.0 50.0 147.0 2.5

SBC10 23.0 21.0 42.0 M10 41.0 M10 20.0 44.0 143.0 2.5

SBC12 35.0 23.5 54.0 M12 48.0 M10 26.0 58.0 216.0 3.5

SBC16 30.0 29.5 58.0 M16 55.5 M12 28.0 58.3 318.0 5.5

-Beam Clamps can generally be secured by safety straps.


-Beam Clamps shall be secured when using Beam for pipes larger than DN65 to avoid slipping of beam.

bts-saarburg.de · www.bts-saarburg.de · Tel.: +49 6581 9168-0 · Fax: +49 6581 9168-79

227
SYSTEM EXAMPLES
C-Channel Framing Systems 21x41

Base Plate with double fix

C-Channel

228
Suitable for pipes with nominal diameters
up to 25 mm

C-Channel

21

41

L Bracket

kg

Frame constructions: will be


manufactured to your measurements

C-Channel
L Bracket
C-Channel
with L Bracket
C-Channel

nut with spring

Base Plate with


Double Channel
Double Fix

B2B Channel
B2B Channel
Base Plate with
Double Channel
Base Plate with Double Fix
double fix Base Plate with
double fix

229
SYSTEM EXAMPLES
C-Channel Framing Systems 41x41

Suitable for pipes with nominal diameters up to 80 mm or 150 mm


with short spans or agreed applications

Base Plate with


double fix
41

41

kg
C-Channel

kg
U Bracket

230
L Bracket

C-Channel kg

Base Plate with


double fix

Angle fittings, fixing plates etc.

L Bracket

Delta Bracket

L Bracket

C-Channel

C-Channel

Base Plate with


double fix
U Bracket

Base Plate with C-Channel


double fix
Base Plate with
double fix

231
SYSTEM EXAMPLES
C-Channel Framing Systems 21x41

Support structures for heavy duty

kg

kg

Support structures for light duty

C-Channel

L Bracket
kg

kg
Base Plate with
double fix kg

kg

kg

kg

232
kg
kg
kg
kg kg

kg

233
CANTILEVERS
& BEAMS
CANTILEVER ARM BRACKET
Cantilever Arm Brackets - SCA

CCH421 41x21x2.5

Length Allowable Load


A (mm) F1* F2* Fz**
150 1.10 0.60 3.10
A 300 0.60 0.30 3.10
450 0.40 0.20 3.10
600 0.30 0.10 3.10
700 0.20 0.10 3.10
800 0.20 0.10 3.10
900 0.20 0.10 3.10
1000 0.20 0.10 3.10

Base plate : height (h) x width (b) x thickness (t)


100 50 8
•In the case of concrete support frame, use anchor M10
•In the case of concrete C-Channel frame, Hexbolt M8 .
** Connection force (pull-out force) : 3.10 (kN)

Length Allowable Load


A (mm) F1* F2* Fz**
150 3.10 1.50 7.50
A 300 1.50 0.80 7.50
450 1.00 0.50 7.50
600 0.80 0.40 7.50
700 0.70 0.30 7.50
800 0.60 0.30 7.50
900 0.50 0.30 7.50
1000 0.50 0.20 7.50

Base plate : height (h) x width (b) x thickness (t)


140 50 10
•In the case of concrete support frame, use anchor M16 .
•In the case of concrete C-Channel frame, Hexbolt M8.
** Connection force (pull-out force) : 7.50 (kN)

* Given Loads are always in [kN] “ Allowable characteristic live load “

F1 or F2
25

h
h-50

1/2 A 1/2 A
Length A (mm)
25

b
t

236
Cantilever Arm Brackets - SCA

CCH422 41x21x2.5 B2B

Length Allowable Load


A (mm) F1* F2* Fz**
150 2.50 1.30 4.80
A
300 1.30 0.60 4.80
450 0.80 0.40 4.80
600 0.60 0.30 4.80
700 0.50 0.30 4.80
800 0.50 0.20 4.80
900 0.40 0.20 4.80
1000 0.40 0.20 4.80

Base plate : height (h) x width (b) x thickness (t)


140 50 10

•In the case of concrete support frame, use anchor M12.


•In the case of concrete C-Channel frame, Hexbolt M8.
** Connection force (pull-out force) : 4,8 (kN)

CCH442 41x41x2.5 B2B

Length Allowable Load


A (mm) F1* F2* Fz**
150 7.00 3.50 8.30
A 300 3.50 1.80 8.30
450 2.30 1.20 8.30
600 1.80 0.90 8.30
700 1.50 0.80 8.30
800 1.30 0.70 8.30
900 1.20 0.60 8.30
1000 1.10 0.50 8.30

Base plate : height (h) x width (b) x thickness (t)


180 60 12
•In the case of concrete support frame, use anchor M16.
•In the case of concrete C-Channel frame, Hexbolt M10 .
** Connection force (pull-out force) : 8,30 (kN)

* Given Loads are always in [kN] “ Allowable characteristic live load “

F1 or F2
25

h
h-50
25

1/2 A 1/2 A
b
t Length A (mm)

237
CANTILEVER ARM BRACKET
Cantilever Arm Brackets - SCA

U - Support / 3000

3000

U-Support with welded-on head plate 200 x 100 x 5mm

Order Example
Order Example:
Item (h) (t) 3000 - Length (L) - Thickness (t)
For more ordering details, please check page 100
5 0200 3000

I - Support / 3050 Head Plate / 3100

x 100 x 5mm 200

3050 3100

U-Support with welded-on head plate 200 x 100 x 5mm

Order Example
Order Example:
Item (h) (t) 3000 - Length (L) - Thickness (t)
For more ordering details, please check page 100
5 0200 3050

238
Wall Bracket / 3200 - 3250

For U-Support 3200 for I-Support


Thickness 5 mm

3200 3250

U-Support with welded-on head plate 200 x 100 x 5mm

Order Example
Order Example:
Item (h) (t) 3200 - Length (L) - Thickness (t)
For more ordering details, please check page 100
5 0200 3200

Support Connectors / 3300 Clamping Plates / 3350

3300 3350

Order Example
Order Example:
Item (h) (t) 3300/3350 - Length (L) - Thickness (t)
For more ordering details, please check page 100
5 0200 3300

5 0200 3350

239
CANTILEVER ARM BRACKET
Cantilever Arm Brackets - SCA

Support Plates / 3400

3400

Support Clamps / 3450 Clamping Angles / 3550

3450 3550

240
Angles / 3600

3600

241
FASTENERS,
BOLTS AND
NUTS
FRAMING SYSTEMS
Round Washers DIN 125, ASTM F436
Washers (SRW) D d S
DIN 125 Zinc Plated Stainless Steel
(mm) (mm) (mm)
ASTM F436
M6 M6 12 6.4 1.6
M8 M8 16 8.4 1.6
Order Example:
M10 M10 21 10.5 2 SRW - M 12 -DIN 115
M12 M12 24 13 2.5
M16 M16 30 17 3
M18 M18 34 19 3.2
M20 M20 39 20.5 3.6

Round Washers DIN 440, DIN 9021


Washers (SRW) D d S
DIN 440, DIN Zinc Plated Stainless Steel
(mm) (mm) (mm)
DIN 9021
440 M6 22 6.6 2
9021 M8 M8 24 8.4 2 Order Example:
9021 M10 M10 30 10.5 2.5 SRW - M 12
440 M12 45 13.5 4 DIN 9021
9021 M12 M12 37 13 3
9021 M16 M16 50 17 3

Square Washers SSW


Square Washers (SSW) axbxd
Stainless Steel
H.D. Glavanized Bolt
Bolt (mm)
SSW 40/40 Order Example:
for all channels M8 M10 40 x 40 x (4-5-6) SSW 41/41
41/21 Series M 12 - d
M10 M12 40 x 40 x (4-5-6)
SSW 41/41 M12 M16 40 x 40 x (4-5-6)
for all channels
41/41 Series

244
Fully Threaded Rods Grade 4.6 DIN 975 ASTM A 36, A193
Threaded Rod (STR) - DIN 975 - ASTM A36 Length Load cap.
Zinc Plated Thread
(mm) (kN)
M6 2000/3000 2.2
M8 2000/3000 4.0
M10 2000/3000 6.4
M12 2000/3000 12.9
M16 2000/3000 17.3
M18 2000 22.0
M20 2000 27.0

Round Head Machine Screws


Round Head
(SRH)
DIN 7985
Length d
Zinc Plated Thread
(mm) (mm)
M6 30-40 6.0
Order Example:
M8 30-40 8.0 SRH - M 10
M10 20-60 10.0 DIN 7985

Coupler Sleeves Rounded


Coupler D L Load
Sleeves (SCS) Electroplated Thread Stainless Steel Thread
cap.
(mm) (mm) (kN)
M6 M6 10/10 15 2.2
M8 M8 12/14 20 4.0 Order Example:
SCS - M 16
M10 M10 13/16 25 6.4
M12 M12 16/20 30 9.3
M16 M16 21/25 40 17.3
M20 M20 26/32 50 27.0

245
FRAMING SYSTEMS
Roofing Bolts
S S
Roofing Bolts Zinc
- Materials : low carbon steel , Plated Stainless Steel
(SRB) DIN EN
carbon steel Dimension- ZP Dimension
- Steel S235 , grade 4.6 , 4.8 M4
x-y
M5 M6 M8
[mm] [mm]
Order Example: d
Thread Size x-y x-y x-y
and 8.8 SRB - M 6
M 6 x 12 (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) D
- Surfaces : plain , black and 10 10
zinc plated M 6 x 25 Length 10 - 50 10 - 80 12 - 120 16 - 150

- Length = X (mm) – Y (mm) M 8 x 25 M 8 x 25


13 13
M 8 x 40
M 10 x 20
M 10 x 30 M 10 x 30
M 10 x 45 M 10 x 45
17 16
M 10 x 60
M 10 x 70
S

M 12 x 22
M 12 x 25 M 12 x 25
Carriage Bolts with Nut Below Head DIN 603
M 12 x 30 M 12 x 30
Carriage H Zinc M 12 x 40H.D. M 12 x 40Square Square
Bolts P Plated Glavanized Grade 4.6
Head Head
Width
19
Depth
18
)STC( M 12 x 50
E (E) (E) (A) (H) (O) (P)
M 12 x 60 mmM 12
mmx 60 mm mm
M5 M 12 x 80M5 12.0M 12
3.0x 80 5.0 3.2 Order Example:
STC - M 6
M6 M 12 x 90M6 15.1 3.70 6.40 4.0
O M8
M 16 x 40M8 18.3 4.50
M 16 x 40 8.23 4.75
M10 M10 21.44 5.30 9.86 24
5.56 24
M 16 x 60 M 16 x 60
M16 M16 34.14 8.74 16.3 8.74
A M 16 x 90 M 16 x 90

Order Example : HB - ZP - M 12 × 1000

S/m S/m e
Hexagon Nuts DIN 934, DIN EN Zinc
24032, ASTM A
Plated 563
Stainless Steel
DIN ISO
Thread - ZP Thread
Hexagon nut S/m [mm]
S/m [mm] [mm]
Zinc Plated Stainless Steel e
(SHN) DIN ISO
M 6
Thread Thread M 6(mm) 10/
(mm) 5 (mm) 6
10/ 11,5
DIN 934 or ISO
4032 M
M6 8 M6 M 810/5 13/6,5
10/6 13/7,5
11.5 15,0
(= DIN EN M8
M 10
M8 13/6.5
M 10
13/7.5
17/ 8
15.0
16/ 9,5 Order Example:
19,6- M
e M10 M10 17/8 16/9.5 19.6 SHN 12
24032)
M 12
M12 M12 M 1219/10 19/10
18/12 18/12
21.9 21,9
ASTM A563
M16 M16
M 16 M 1624/13 24/15.5
24/13 27.7
24/15,5 27,7
M18 M18 26/16 26/16 22.0
m

M20 M20 30/18 29/20.5 27.0

246
M 10 M 10 1000 6,4
M 12 M 12 1000 12,9
M 16 M 16 1000 17,3
FRAMING SYSTEMS
Ordera Example
Hexagonal Rod Coupler Grade 8.8 ASRM 563 : TR - ZP - M 12 × 1000
Hexagonal Rod Load
Coupler with D L
cap.
view hole (SHR) Electroplated Thread Stainless Steel Thread
(mm) (mm) (kN)
M10 M10 13 40 6.4
Order Example:
M12 M12 17 40 9.3 HRC - GV - M 12
M16 M16 22 50 17.3
M 18 M 18 23 60 22.0
M 20 M 20 25 70 27.0

S S
Zinc Plated Stainless Steel
DIN EN
Dimension- ZP Dimension
Machine HexHead Bolts DIN 933, DIN 24017, ASTM A307, A449 [mm] [mm]

Hex Head Bolt M 6 x 12


Zinc Plated Stainless Steel
S DIN S EN 10 10
(SHB)
DIN 933 or
Dimension M Dimension
6 x 25 (mm) (mm)
EN 24017 M 8 x 25 M
10 8 x 25
M 6 x 12
ASTM A307, A449 M 6 x 25
10 Order Example:
HB - 7P - M 12 x
13 13
(without nut) M 8 x 25 M M8 8xx 40
25
13 13 1000
M 8 x 40
M 10 x 20 M 10 x 20
M 10 x 30 M 10 x 30
M 10 x 45 M 10
M 10xx 30
45 17 M
16 10 x 30
M 10 x 60
M 10 x 70 M 10 x 45 M 10 x 45
M 12 x 22
17 16
M 12 x 25 M 10
M 12xx 60
25
M 12 x 30 M 12 x 30
M 12 x 40 M 10
M 12xx 70
40
19 18
S

M 12 x 50
M 12 x 60 M 12
M 12xx 22
60
M 12 x 80 M 12 x 80
M 12 x 90
M 12 x 25 M 12 x 25
M 16 x 40 M 16 x 40
M 16 x 60
M 12 x 30
M 16 x 60 24
M
24
12 x 30
M 16 x 90
M 12 x 40
M 16 x 90
M 12 x 40
M 18 x 40 M 18 x 40 19 18
M 18 x 50
M 12 x 50
M 18 x 50
27 26
M 18 x 60 M 18 x 60
M 18 x 80 M 12 x 60
M 18 x 80 M 12 x 60
M 20 x 40 M 20 x 40
M 20 x 50 M 12 x 80
M 20 x 50
32 M
32 12 x 80
Hex Head Bolt USED M 20 x 60 M 20 x 60
in combination with M 20 x 80 M 12 x 90
M 20 x 80
channels nuts.
M 16 x 40 M 16 x 40
24 24
M 16 x 60 M 16 x 60
M 16 x 90 M 16 x 90

Order Example : HB - ZP - M 12 × 1000


247
HEAVY DUTY
SYSTEMS
GENERAL INFORMATION
Direction of Loading
The direction of the applied load shall be considered to determine the most appropriate anchor. The tension and shear
components shall be lesser than the recommended load/design resistance in the direction concerned.

Tensile Loading
Tensile loads are applied along the axis of fixing (see Fig.1).
Common examples include suspended ceiling applications and the suspension of mechanical services, pipework ,
ductwork ,etc ...

Shear Loads
Shear loads act at right angles to the axis of fixing and directly against the face of the structural material (see Fig.2).
Shear performance is governed mainly by the shear strength of the bolt material and by the compressive strength of the
supporting substrate.

Oblique / Combined Loads


Oblique loads are a combination of tension and shear components (see Fig.3).
If the angle of the applied oblique load is within 10˚ of pure tension or pure shear, the safe working load for that direction
may be assumed. Otherwise, the applied oblique load shall be resolved into its shear and tensile components.

Offset Loads
Offset loads act at right angles to the fixing axis but are offset from the surface (see Fig.4).
In this situation, the deflection of the bolt due to bending needs to be considered as well as the shear capacity of the
anchor 

Slotted Holes in Fixture


When fixing anchors through slotted holes; it is important to ensure that there is an adequate surface of contact between
the washer and the fixture to guarantee a positive clamping force. If in doubt, a square plate washer with a thickness of
3mm or above would be recommended in place of the standard washer supplied.

Diamond Drilled Holes


When holes are formed in the structure using a diamond drilling system; extra care is required to ensure the holes are
thoroughly cleaned by brushing and blowing for at least three times. Also, to make a key for the anchor (particularly if
a bonded anchor is installed) the sides of the hole shall be roughened up by inserting a standard masonry bit into the
hole attached to a hammer action drilling machine. A resin with minimal shrinkage shall be selected for diamond drilled
holes.

250
Fig.1
Fig.2

Fig.3

Fig.4

251
Yellow zinc Stainless
plated
EXPANSION STEEL ANCHOR - STMSteel Steel
Yellow z
STM
Thread
STM/H
(Zn) Thread
plated S
Expansion Steel Anchor Thread
M6 M6 M6
M8 M8 M8

M 10 M 10 M 10
Features: M 12
• Suitable for all screws or threaded bolts with metric thread.
M 12
• Low energy impact, power-saving assembly.
• Multiple removing and fixing. Order exa
• Inside threaded anchor, allows great flexibility.
• Can use variable lengths and art of threaded rods or bolts. Order example: STM - Zn - M
• Small edge distance and small distance between anchors.
• Provide uniform load by tightening the screw or hexagon nut, the cone pulls into the expansion anchor and tightens
against the drilled hole.
• Suitable for use in concrete and natural stone.

Typical Applications:
Cable Trays, handrails, brackets, staircases, ladders, machines, window panels, base plates, scaffoldings and frameworks

Technical Data: Yellow zinc Stainless


Recommended loads (non cracked -concreted C 20/25). plated Steel Steel
Type Tension Load Shear Load Thread (Zn) Bending
Moment
Thread
Screw Grade
(order No)
(kN) (kN) (Nm) (Nm)
M6
M8
2.5
3.3
2.3
4.4
M6 3.9
17
8.8
8.8
M6
M10 4.7 6.5 34 8.8
M12 6.9 8.5
M8 60
*for cracked concrete we shall use 0,5 x this value (approximately)
8.8
M8
Materials: M 10 M 10
• zinc plated steel.
• stainless steel [ SS 304 (A2), SS 316 (A4) ]. M 12

Order example: STMH - Zn -

252
Fea tur es

Metal Pr
• Sma ll
• Torqu
• Zinc p
• Throu
Setting Data:
Applicat
Edge distance > 1,5 x H eff., distance between anchors > 3 x H eff. steel con
Thickness of foundation > 2 x H eff.

Edge Distance Thickness of


Tightening Spanner
H eff. Distance Between Foundation Washer
Size Torque size
C Anchors S hmin
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (Ø) (Nm) (mm)
M6 40 60 120 100 12 x 1.6 10 10
M8 45 68 135 100 16 x 1.6 20 13
M10 55 83 165 110 20 x 2.0 40 17
M12
Throughbolt,
70
Type
105
stainless
Tension load
steel
210
Shear load
A4/316 140 24 x 2.5
Bending moment Tighten torque
75 19
Distance between Distance t
(kN) (kN) (Nm) (Nm) anchor S (mm) C (mm
Installation Parameters:
(Order No)

M6 2.0 2.5 4.20 8.0 105 55.


3.0 Fea tur es 120 60.
H eff = Effective anchorage M 8
depth. 3.3 5.30 25.0
M10 5.0 5.5 12.80 • Europea n 150
40.0 Technica l App75.
ro
M12 7 .5 8.0 25.0 50.0 225 115
• Torque controlled expansi
Length
Drill (Ø) Drilling depth H eff. Usable Length Screw Ø x Length
Bolt Size exp.unit
I nsta lla tion • Applications in damp area
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)• Stainless(mm)steel A4/316
M6 45 10 55 40 5 • Face xing
M6 x 50or through xin
M8 50 12 60 45 10 M8 x 60
M10 60 15 80 55 20 M10 x 80
M12 75 18 90 70 25 Applications
M12 x 90
fa ca des, ca ble tra ys, ra ilings, s
M H A -S Sleeve Anchor with hexagon screw under-constructions, high-ra
Usable Length Thickness of Foundation

Spaner
Size M

Bolt Size Tension load Shear load Bending moment Heff. Edge Distance Distance between Washer
(kN) (kN) (Nm) (mm) C (mm) anchor S (mm) (Ø)
Washer H eff
M6 2.6 3.3 5.5 40 60 120 12 x 1.6
M8 4.1 6.3 13Drilling depth 50 75 150 16 x 1.6
M10 M
5.8H A -B Sleeve
8.5 Anchor with
26.5 threaded58bolt and nut
87 174 20 x 2.0
M12 9.2 12 46.5 Length 68 102 204 24 x 2.5
M16 14 23 118.5 80 120 240 30 x 3.0

Installation
I nsta lla tion
1 2 3 4

Tinst

2 1 - Drill a hole and clean it with a brush, remove dust with a blower. | 2 - Place the plug and the object to fix.
3 - Tighten the screw. | 4 - Fixing completed.

Usable
Plug & drill Ø Length Length
(mm) (mm) (mm)
6 2535 0 5
6 65 10
DROP-IN ANCHOR - SDA
SDA

Features:
• Provides permanently fixed threaded socket in concrete.
• Use in non-cracked concrete or cracked concrete and natural stone.
• The anchor will spread and tighten against the drilled hole after
inserting with setting tool.
• Low setting depth, reduced drilling time.
• Enables cost-effective assembly .
• Multiple removing and fixing.

Typical Applications:
Pipes, ventilation ducts, suspended ceilings, sprinkler systems, brackets, threaded rods and Cable Trays.

Technical Data:

Bending
Type Tension Load Shear Load Screw Grade
Moment
(order No)
(kN) (kN) (Nm) (Nm)
M6 2.5 2.3 3.9 8.8
M8 3.3 4.4 17 8.8
M10 4.7 6.5 34 8.8
M12 6.9 8.5 60 8.8
M H A Sleeve Anchor
Metal Products

*for cracked concrete we shall use 0,5 x this value (approximately)

Fea tur es
Materials: • Sma ll e
• Torque
• zinc plated steel.
• stainless steel [ SS 304 (A2), SS 316 (A4) ].
• Zinc pla
• Throug
Setting Data:
Applicatio
Edge distance > 1.5 x effective anchorage depth, distance between anchors steel const
> 3,0 x effective anchorage depth, min. thickness of foundation > 2,5 x H eff.

Edge Distance Thickness of


Tightening Spanner
H eff. Distance Between Foundation Washer
Size Torque size
C Anchors S hmin
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (Ø) (Nm) (mm)
M6 25 37.5 75 100 4 10 10
M8 30 45 90 100 9 13 13
M10 40 60 120 130 17 17 17
M12 50 75 150 140 30 19 19
Type Tension load Shear load Bending moment Tighten torque Distance between Distance to e
M16 65 197.5 195 No)
(Order 160
(kN) 75 (kN) 24 (Nm) (Nm) anchor S (mm) C (mm)

M6 2.0 2.5 4.20 8.0 105 55.0


254 M8 3.0 3.3 5.30 25.0 120 60.0
M10 5.0 5.5 12.80 40.0 150 75.0
M12 7 .5 8.0 25.0 50.0 225 115.0
GE ANCHOR
(l)
- STAINLESS STEEL (do)
Installstud
1. Internally threaded to take withor
manual
(ho )
(Tinst )
bolt. setting tool or mechanical setting tool •2. Easy
Face xingby
to install orhammer
through xin
action.
for 8use with hammer 3. Slotted sleeve and captive interna
6 25
2. Easy to 11 by hammer
install action. 27action drilling4.5
machines. 77-108 WA-06
ng tool ANCHOR HOLE HOLE
MAXIMUM
facilitate easy setting and expans
8 30 13 THREAD
3. Slotted sleeveSIZE 10
and captiveLENGTHinternal tapered32
THREAD LENGTH 11
wedge toDIAMETER 77-120 DEPTH
Applications
WA-08
RECOMMENDED
PRODUCT
(mm) desTORQUE
0 40 facilitate easy
15 (d) 12 TYPICAL
(mm) APPLICATIONS
42 22 (mm) 77-132 (mm) fa caWA-10 , ca ble tra ys, rCODE
a ilings, s
setting ande expansion. (lG )
( l ) permanently fixing (do) in concrete (ho ) good
(Nm)
2 50 20 15
For
52
threaded sockets
38 77-141
and under-constructions,
quality(Tstone.
WA-12inst ) high-ra
e Ideal for secure fixing for mechanical services, cable trays, platforms, drain covers, suspended
6 65
Installation 25 M6
Parameters: 20e 25 67 11 that may
Securing equipment
8 to be77-150
95 need 27
removed or replaced. WA-16 4.5 77-608
0crete and good
80 quality stone.35 M8 25 30 82 13 185 10 77-16232 WA-20 11 77-620
H eff = Effectivedrain
s, cable trays, WEDGEanchorage
platforms,
R-DCA M10covers,
ANCHOR depth. 40PLATED
suspended
- ZINC 15 etc.
ceilings 12 42 22 77-632
Anchor Length H eff
moved M12 50 20 15 52 38 77-641
STEELor replaced. Anchor Thread Drill Drilling
Effective
Min. Screw
ANCHOR Max.Screw HOLE HOLE
MAXIMUM
Thread Length
M16 (Ø) Depth65 Anchorage
Length
THREAD 25Depth
LENGTHE
20 LENGTH DIAMETER
THREAD
Depth E
67 DEPTH95 77-650PRODU
RECOMMENDED
Size Bolt Size Tension load ShearDepth
load
SIZEH eff.Bending moment
(mm) MAXIMUMHeff.
(mm) Edge Distance (mm)
(mm) Distance between
TORQUE Washer
CODE
(d) (lG ) (Nm)
AD
ANCHOR (mm) (mm)
THREAD LENGTH (kN)(mm) HOLE
(mm) (kN) (mm) HOLE (mm)
ETA PENDING
(Nm)
( l ) 2007 (mm)
(mm)
RECOMMENDED (do) C (mm) (ho )anchor SDrill
(mm) Ø (Ø)
(Tinst )
LENGTH DIAMETER DEPTH PRODUCT
E
ing Tool (mm)
M6
M8
M25
M
6 (mm)11 2.6 8 (mm)
8
30 (l )
G 13 4.1 10
25
30
3.3M6
6.3
25
(mm) 5.5
30 (h )
25
13
6
8
Mechanical Setting
TORQUE 12 40
118
(Nm)13 50 75
Tool27
CODE 6 0
NEW CODE
120
150
4.5 1277-108
x 1.6
16 x 1.6
( l ) MAXIMUM (d )
HOLE HOLE o M8 o 30 ) 13 58 10 E 32 1 7 4 11 2077-120
15 5.8 12 8.5 40 26.5 x 2.0
M 1400 (Tinst17 87 E= Screw Depth
M10 RECOMMENDED 40 10
DIAMETER DEPTH
M12 9.2
TORQUE
12
PRODUCT
M10 46.5
40
NEW CODE 15 68 12 1 0 2 Drilling
42 Depth 2 0 4 22 2477-132
x 2.5
6 (mm) 25 M12 (mm) M 1506 11 20 (Nm)14 16 8 50 CODE 23 50 27 12
118.5 4.5 18 80 77-608 1 2 0 WA-A4-06 240 30 x 3.0
M16 65 25 20 65 M12 65 50
16 2320 15 52 38 77-141
8 (do) 30 (ho ) 13 (Tinst ) 10 M16
32 65
11 25
77-620
20
WA-A4-08
67 95 77-150
0 40 27
Installation 15 4.5 12 77-108 M20 42 WA-06
80 22 35 77-632
25 WA-A4-10
82 185 77-162
THREAD SIZE THREAD
2 10 50I nsta32lla tion20 11 15 77-120 52 WA-08 38 77-641 WA-A4-12 (d)
(d)
6 12 1
R-DCA
65 WEDGE 25 ANCHOR 2 -20
STAINLESS STEEL
67 3 95 77-650 4 WA-A4-16
42 22M6 77-132 WA-10 M6
15 52 38M8 77-141 WA-12
ANCHOR HOLE HOLE
MAXIMUM M8
THREAD THREAD LENGTH RECOMMENDED
LENGTH DIAMETER DEPTH PRODU
20 67 Mechanical
95M10 77-150Setting
SIZE
(d)
Tool
WA-16
(mm)
(mm)
(lG )
(mm) (mm) Tinst TORQUE
(Nm)
M10
CODE
(l) (do) (ho )
25 82 185M12 77-162 WA-20 (Tinst ) M12
M6 25 118 27
1 - Drill a hole and clean it with a brush, remove dust with a blower. | 2 - Insert the anchor sleeve in the hole.4.5 77-608
M16
2 M163 - Tighten to theM8
recommended 30torque. | 4 -13Fixing completed.
10 32 11 77-620
M20 M20
M10 40 15 12 42 22 77-632
M12 50 20 15 52 38 77-641
Usable
on
HREAD
HOLE
(d)
SIZE
DIAMETER Manual
HOLE
DEPTH Setting
MAXIMUM
Tool
RECOMMENDED M16
PRODUCT
65 25
THREAD SIZE
20 (d) Plug67&GRIP
drill TYPE
(mm)
Ø Length
95
(mm)
77-650
Length
(mm)
TORQUE NEW CODE
M6(mm) (mm) CODE
(Nm) the internal wedge into the anchor.
M6 SDS-plus
6 50 5
(do) Use the(hsetting
Manual tool Tool
o )Setting to drive Mechanical 6 Tool
Setting 65 10
M8 (Tinst ) M8 SDS-plus
6 80 25
M10 6
SDS-plus 95 40
M10 27 4.5 77-608 WA-A4-06 8 50 5
10
M12 32 11 77-620 WA-A4-08 M12 SDS-plus
8 60 10
8 80 10
12
M16 42 22 77-632 WA-A4-10 M16 SDS-max
8 85 15
M20 8
SDS-max 95 25
15
M20 52 38 77-641 WA-A4-12 8 115 45
20 67 95 77-650 WA-A4-16 10 60 5
10 70 10
equired 2. Remove debris and 3. Insert wedge anchor, 4. Use the setting
1 0 tool to 9 5 5. Altern
15
Mechanical Setting Tool 10
depth. thoroughly clean hole with slotted end drive the internal wedge1 1 0 30
settin
echanical Alternatively
Setting Tool
brush
useand
the pump.
mechanical setting tool with an appropriate drilling machine.
10
into the anchor.
10
125
140
45
drillin
60
10 160 80
10 180 100
isory Service Tel: +44 (0) 1530 812 857, Fax: +44 (0) 1530 812 862 12 80 5
12 110 15
Installation 12 125 30
12 145 50
12 165 70
12 185 90
db 34 16 115 10
16 130 15
s and 3. Insert wedge anchor, 4. Use the setting tool to 5. Alternatively 1use
6 mechanical
145 30
ean hole with slotted end drive the internal wedge 1 6 appropriate
setting tool with 160 45
mp. into the anchor. 16
drilling machine. 180 65
20 160 30

1. Drill a hole of required 2. Remove debris and 3. Insert wedge anchor, 4. Use the setting tool to 5. A
30 812 857, Fax: +44 (0)
diameter and1530
depth. 812 862 thoroughly clean hole with slotted end first. drive the internal wedge s
brush and pump. into the anchor. d

34 Technical Advisory Service Tel: +44 (0) 1530 812 857, Fax: +44 (0) 1530 812 862 255
2007-10-15 14:34:42
DROP-IN ANCHOR - SDA
SDA

Features:
• Provides permanently fixed threaded socket in concrete.
• Use in non-cracked concrete or cracked concrete and natural stone.
• The anchor will spread and tighten against the drilled hole after
inserting with setting tool.
• Low setting depth, reduced drilling time.
• Enables cost-effective assembly .
• Multiple removing and fixing.

Typical Applications:
Pipes, ventilation ducts, suspended ceilings, sprinkler systems, brackets, threaded rods and Cable Trays.

Technical Data:
Recommended loads (non cracked-concreted C 20/25).

Threaded Tension Load Shear Load Torque Moment


size
(kN) (kN) (Nm)
M6 2.0 1.2 3.8
M8 3.5 2.2 9.4
M10 4.25 3.5 16.3
M12 5.95 5.0 32.7
M16 9.8 8.4 75
*for cracked concrete we shall use 0,5 x this value (approximately)

Materials:
• zinc plated steel.
• stainless steel [ SS 304 (A2), SS 316 (A4) ].

256
M H A Sleeve Anchor

Metal Prod
Fea tur es
• Sma ll e
• Torque
• Zinc pla
• Throug
Setting Data:
Applicatio
Edge distance > 1.5 x effective anchorage depth, distance between anchors steel constr
> 3,0 x effective anchorage depth, min. thickness of foundation > 2,5 x H eff.

Edge Thickness of
Distance Between Tightening
H eff. Distance Foundation Spanner
Size Anchors S Torque
C hmin size
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (Nm)
M6 25 37.5 75 100 4 10
M8 30 45 90 100 9 13
M10 40 60 120 130 17 17
M12
M16
50
65 Throughbolt, stainless steel A4/316
75
197.5
150
Type
(Order No)
140
(kN)
30 19
195 Tension load 160 Shear load 75 Bending moment
24
(kN)
Tighten torque
(Nm) (Nm)
Distance between Distance to e
anchor S (mm) C (mm)

M6 2.0 2.5 4.20 8.0 105 55.0


Installation Parameters: M8 3.0 3.3 5.30 25.0 120 60.0
M10 5.0 5.5 12.80 Fea tur es
40.0 150 75.0
M12 7 .5 8.0 25.0 50.0 225 115.0
H eff = Effective anchorage depth. • Europea n Technica l Appro
I nsta lla tion • Torque controlled expansi
Effective
Anchor Thread Min.•Screw
Applications
Max.Screw in damp area
Drill (Ø) Drilling Depth Anchorage
Thread Size Length Length Depth E Depth E
Depth H eff. • Stainless steel A4/316
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) • Face xing or through xin
(mm) (mm)
T
M6 25 11 8 25 25 6 12 in
M8 30 13 10 30 30 8 13
M10 40 15 12 40 40 Applications
10 17
M12 50 MH20A -S Sleeve16Anchor with
50 hexagon screw
50 12 18
M16 65 25 20 65 65
fa ca des, ca b
16 23
le
tra ys, ra ilings, s
under-constructions, high-ra

Anchor Length H eff

Drill Ø
Bolt Size Tension load Shear load Bending moment Heff. Edge Distance Distance between Washer
(kN)
M H A -B(kN)Sleeve Anchor
(Nm)
with threaded
(mm)
bolt and Cnut
(mm) anchor S (mm) (Ø)

M6 2.6 3.3 5.5 40 60 120 12 x 1.6


M8 4.1 6.3 E 13E= Screw Depth50 75 150 16 x 1.6
M10 5.8 8.5 26.5 58 87 174 20 x 2.0
M12 9.2 12 Drilling
46.5 Depth 68 102 204 24 x 2.5
M16 14 23 118.5 80 120 240 30 x 3.0

Installation
I nsta lla tion
1 2 3 4

Tinst

21 - Drill a hole and clean it with a brush, remove dust with a blower. | 2 - Insert the anchor sleeve in the hole.
3 - Tighten to the recommended torque. | 4 - Fixing completed.

Usable
Drilling Usable Plug & drill Ø
Setting Length Length
Size Drill Ø Length depth length (mm)
depth min. (mm) Size
(mm)
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
6 2575 0 (mm)
5
M6 8 40 55 5 35 6 65 M6
10
M6 8 65 55 25 35 M6
SLEEVE ANCHOR - SAS
Features:
• Suitable for use in concrete, natural stone, brickwork and blockwork
• Small distance between anchors.
SAS
• Optimum performance in most base material types.
• No protruding threads after installation.
• Small distance between anchors and from edge.
• Controlled expansion.
• Zinc plated > 5µm.
• Effective force distribution in the drilled hole.
• Sleeve anchor with hexagon screw or with threaded bolt.

Typical Applications:
Uni-channel ,railings, steel constructions , machines, high-racks, cable support systems and mechanical fixations.  

Technical Data:
M H A Sleeve AnchorMaterials:
Metal Products

Recommended loads (non cracked-concreted C 20/25). • zinc plated steel.


• stainless steel [ SS 304 (A2), SS 316 (A4) ].
Fea tur es
Tension Load Shear Load Torque Moment
Bolt Size • Sma ll edge
(kN) (kN) (Nm)
M6 2.56 2.0 5.0 • Torque con
M8 3.33 3.3 12.5 • Zinc plated
M10 4.1 5.0 25.5 • Through x
M12 6.66 7.5 .......
*for cracked concrete we shall use 0,5 x this value (approximately)
Applications
Setting Data: steel constructi
Edge distance > 1.5 x effective anchorage depth, distance between anchors
> 3,0 x effective anchorage depth, min. thickness of foundation > 2,5 x H eff.
Distance
Edge Thickness of
Between Washer Tightening
Bolt H eff. Distance Foundation Spanner
Anchors (Ø) Torque
Size C hmin size
S
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (Nm)
M6 35 52.5 105 70 18 x 1.6 8 10
M8 40 60 120 80 16 x 1.6 25 13
M10 50 75 150 100 20 x 2.0 40 17
Type Tension load150 Shear load Bending moment Tighten torque Distance between Distance to edge
M12 75 112.5 225 26 x 2.0 50 (Nm)
19 C (mm)
(Order No) (kN) (kN) (Nm) anchor S (mm)

M6 2.0 2.5 4.20 8.0 105 55.0


M8 3.0 3.3 5.30 25.0 120 60.0
Sleeve Anchor
M 1-0SAS: 5.0 5.5 12.80 40.0 150 75.0
M12 7 .5 8.0 25.0 50.0 225 115.0
with hexagon screw (non-cracked concrete C20/25).

Size
Length nsta Hole
IDrill la tØioinn
lFixture Drilling
Depth
Setting
Depth
H eff.
Min.Usable
Length
Usable Length Drilling Depth

(mm) (Ø) (mm) (mm) (Ø) (mm) (mm)


Spaner
M6 45 8 10 55 35 35 5 Size M Drill Ø

M6 60 8 10 55 35 35 15
M8 60 10 12 60 40 40 15 Washer
H eff
Tinst
M8 80 10 12 60 40 40 25
Setting Depth
M10 70 12 14 70 50 50 15
M12H A -S14 Sleeve
70 Anchor with hexagon screw
Length
M10 100 60 50 35 Drill Ø
*for cracked concrete we shall use 0,5 x this value (approximately).

258
(kN) (kN) (Nm) (mm) C (mm) anchor S (mm) (Ø)

M6 2.6 3.3 5.5 40 60 120 12 x 1.6


load
d Shear
Shear M 8 moment
loadload Bending
Bending 4.1 Tighten
moment
Tighten torque 6.3
torque Distance
Distance 13
between
between Distance
Distance 50Min. Min.
to edge
to edge 7 5 Spanner
thickness
thickness Spanner 1 5 0 Spanner 16 x 1.6
Spanner
(kN) (kN) M 1(Nm)
0 (Nm) 5.8 (Nm)(Nm) 8.5anchor
anchor 26.5
S (mm)
S (mm) C (mm)
C (mm) of found 8 7 size (SAS)
58 of found size (SAS) 1 7 4 size (SAB) 20 x 2.0
size (SAB)
M12 9.2 12 46.5 (hmin)
68 (hmin) mm mm1 0 2 204 24 x 2.5
2.52.5 6 4.20
M 14.20 14 8.0 8.0 23 105105 118.5 55.055.0 80 90.090.0 1 2 0 10.010.0 2 4 0 10.010.030 x 3.0
3.33.3 5.305.30 25.025.0 120120 60.060.0 100.0
100.0 13.013.0 13.013.0
5.55.5 12.80
12.80 40.040.0 150150 75.075.0 120.0
120.0 17.017.0 15.015.0
8.08.0 25.025.0 50.050.0 225225 115.0
115.0 140.0
140.0 --- --- 19.019.0
Installation of Sleeve Anchor - SAS
I nsta lla tion
1 2 3

Tinst Tinst Tinst

1 - Drill a hole and clean it with a brush, remove dust with a blower. | 2 - Insert the sleeve anchor through the fixture
enchor with
Anchor hexagon
with 2hexagon screw
screw Drill ØDrm
illm
Ø mm LengthLength ThreadThDrreilalidngDdreilp
into the hole. | 3 - Tighten to the recommended torque.
litnhgU
desapb
thleU
lesnagbtlh
eleSn
eg
tttih
ngSdeetp
titnhgdepth
mm mm mm mm mm mm min. min.
mm mm
M6 M6
Sleeve Anchor - SAB: MPlug
6 M 6& drill Ø Usable
Length Length
M 8 M(mm) 8 (mm)
M8 M8 (mm)
With threaded bolt and nut.
M 1 0M 1 06 50 5
Hole Ø Min. Min. Max. M 1 0M 1 06 65 10
Length Drill (Ø) in Fix- Drilling Setting H eff. Usable 6 80 25
Size ture Depth Depth Length 6 95 40
8 50 5
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (Ø) (mm) (mm)
Usable Length 8 60 10
M6 49 8 10 29 27 25 20 8 80 10
enchor with
Anchor threaded
with 64 bolt
M6threaded 8and
bolt nut
and nut
10 29 27 25 35 8
Drilling
85
Usable
15
M8 60 10 12 34 32 30 25 Plug & drill
PlugSize Ø
& drill Ø
Spanner Length
Length Drill
8 Drilling 9 5 Usable 2Setting
5 Se
M Depth
8 Ø Depth
1Length
1 5 Length Depth
5 Dep
4(mm) M
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) 1 0 (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
M8 75 10 12 34 32 30 40 60 5 (
M8 105 10 12 34 32 30 70 8 8 45 45 1 055 55 7 05 5 1 03 5
8 8 Washer 6 0 6 0 5
10 55 5 H eff 1 5
95 15 1 53 5
M8 85 10 12 34 32 30 50 10 10 60 60 6
10 60 0
Setting Depth 1 5
110 15 3 04 0
M10 73 12 14 44 42 40 25 10 10 80 80 06 0 Depth
1Drilling 60 1 2255 2 5 4 54 0
M10 88 12 14 44 42 40 40 12 12 70 70 7
10 70 0
Length 1 5
140 15 6 05 0
M10 108 12 14 44 42 40 60
12 12 1 0 01 0 0 1 07 0 7 0 1 6305 3 5 8 05 0
M10 138 12 14 44 42 40 90 10 180 100
12 80 5
M12 100 16 18 64 62 60 30 12 110 15
M12 120 16 18 64 62 60 50 12 125 30
M16 165 20 22 84 82 80 70 12 145 50
12 165 70
12 185 90
Installation ( push-through installation ) 16 115 10
16 130 15
16 145 30
1 2 3 4 16 160 45
16 180 65
20 160 30

Drilling Usable Setting Drilling Usable Setting


Length Size Drill Ø Length
Length 1Drilling
depth
depth
Usable depthSetting
- Place thelength
fixture (object)
length
min.drill a hole.| 2 - Remove dust
and
depth min. with
Sizea blower
Drilland
Ø cleanLength withDrilling
the hole depthdepth
Usable depth m
a brush. length
length
Se
dep
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
(mm) 3 - Tap
(mm)the anchor(mm) (mm) with a hammer or a setting(mm)
through the fixture tool. | 4 -(mm)
Tighten to the(mm)
recommended (mm)torque. (mm) (
40 55 5 35 M6 8 45 55 5 35
65 40 55 55 25 5 35 35 M6 M6 8 8 60 45 55 55 15 5 35
50 65 55
Installation
60 25 40 35 installation )
( pre-positioned
5 M8 M6 10 8 60 60 60 55 15 15 40
75 50 60 60 30 5 40 40 M8 M8 10 10 80 60 60 60 25 15 40
95 75 60 60 50 30 40 40 M10M8 12 10 70 80 70 60 15 25 50
75 95 1 70 60 15 50 2 50 40 3 M10M10 12 12 1004 70 70 70 35 15 50
10075 70 70 40 15 50 50 M10 12 100 70 35
130100 70 70 70 40 50 50
65130 90 70 5 70 75 50
11065 90 90 25 5 75 75
145110 90 90 60 25 75 75
145 90 60 75

1 - Drill a hole of requested diameter and depth. | 2 - Remove dust with a blower and clean the hole with a brush.
3 - Tap with a hammer or a setting tool until fixing depth is reached.| 4 -Tighten to the recommended torque.

259
50
THROUGH BOLT (WEDGE ANCHOR) - STB
Features:
• Suitable for use in cracked concrete or in non-cracked concrete and
in natural stone. SDB
• Special design of the clip in stainless steel which ensures a safe hold
in the hole.
• Torque controlled expansion.
• Zinc plated > 5µm.
• User friendly, face fixing or through fixing.

Typical Applications:
Uni - channel, hand rails, steel constructions, Cable Trays, supports, brackets, ducts and shelf feet.

Technical Data:
Through bolt zinc plated (non-cracked C20/25).
Usable Length
Drilling Depth
Tension Load Shear Load Torque Moment
Bolt Size
(kN) (kN) Throughbolt, stainless steel A4/316
(Nm)
M6
M8
2.1
4.0
1.9
4.0
Throughbolt, stainless steel A4/316
4.0
15.0
Drill Ø

M10 5.9 5.95 30.0 F


Fea tur e•s
Washer
H eff
M12 8.8 10.0 50.0
Setting Depth

M16 12 16.0 100 Bolt Length • Europ• e


*for cracked concrete we shall use 0,5 x this value (approximately) • Torque •
• Applic•
Materials: • Stainle•
• Face x
• Zinc plated steel.
• Stainless steel [ SS 304 (A2) , SS 316 (A4) ]. A
Applicati
M H A Sleeve Anchor fa
Metal Products

fa ca des, c
u
under-co
Fea tur e
• Sma l
• Torqu
Through bolt • Zinc
• Throu
Bolt Bolt
Size Size Tension
Tension load load Shear load
Shear load
BendingBending
momentmoment
Heff. Heff.Edge Distance
Edge Distan
Distan
Setting Data: (kN) (kN) (kN) (kN) (Nm) (Nm) (mm) (mm) C (mm) Applicaanch
C (mm)

M6 M6 2.6 2.6 3.3 3.3 5.5 5.5 40 40 60 steel6c0on


M 8anchors
Edge distance > 1,5 H eff. , distance between M8 > 4.1
3 x H4.1
eff. 6.3 6.3 13 13 50 50 75 75
M 1 0M 1 0 5.8 5.8 8.5 8.5 26.5 26.5 58 58 87 87
Thickness of foundation > 2 x H eff. M 1 2M 1 2 9.2 9.2 12 46.5 46.5 68 102
12 68 102
Edge Dis- Distance M 1 6M 1 6 14
Thickness
14 of 23 118.5 118.5 80 120
Tightening 23 80 120
Bolt H eff. tance Between Washer Foundation Spanner
Torque
Size C Anchors S hmin Size
(mm) (mm) (mm) (Ø) (mm) (Nm)
M6 40 60 I n120
sta lla tion
12 x 1.6 100 7 10
M8 50 75 150 I nsta lla16tiox 1.6
n 100 14 13
M10 58 87 174 20 x 2.0 120 30 17
M12 68 102 204 24 x 2.5 140 35 19
M16 80 120 Type 240 Tension30load
x 3.0 Shear
160 load Bending moment
80 24 Tighten torque Tinst
Distance between Distance
(Order No) (kN) (kN) (Nm) (Nm) anchor S (mm) C (m

M6 2.0 2.5 4.20 8.0 105 55


260 M8 2 3.0 3.3 5.30 25.0 120 60
M10 2 5.0 5.5 12.80 40.0 150 75
M12 7 .5 8.0 25.0 50.0 225 115
Installation Parameters:
hroughbolt,
oughbolt, stainless
Throughbolt,
stainless
Through bolt steel
steel
zinc plated, stainless A4/316
stainless
A4/316
steel or hot-dip galvanized.
steel A4/316
Hole Ø in Fix- Usable Length
Bolt Length Drill Ø Drilling Depth Setting Depth H eff.
Bolt Size ture Fix
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
40 6 6.5 FeaF35
teuar etusr es 27 Fea tur es 3
.....
• E u ro pea n T ec hn i
• E35uropea n Tec35hnica l Appr35ca l A p
•p
o varEol uvOraoplptO
ieoapnn
ti7oTnfeoc7rhufnonicrcarualncAckrpeapdcrkocevo
55 6 6.5 15
M6
70 6 6.5

• Torque
35
Torque controlled
controlled
35
expansion
expansion• Torque controlled
35 30 expansi
95 6 6.5 • Applications
• Applications in damp areas
35 35 in damp 35areas
• Applications and outdoors
and outdoorsin damp area
55
50 8 9 • Stainless steel
• Stainless steel A4/316
35 35 A4/316 •
..... Stainless 10steel A4/316
65 8 9 • Face
40
• Face xingxing40 or through
or through • xing
.....
xing Face xing or through xin
20
M8 80 8 9 40 40 40 35
95 8 9 40 40 40 50
Applications
Applications Applications
105 8 9 40 40 40 60
65 10 11
fa c a des, ca b le tra ys, ra ili
fa ca40des, ca ble tr40a ys, ra ilings40n,fag
stcsea,ed
slteecseo,lnccsatorb15
nlcsettrio
u turan
ctsyi,osm
,nrsaa, cim
lhinaingceshs,i,n
s
80 10 11 under-constructions,
under-constructions,
50 50 high-racks,
50under-constructions,
high-racks, pro les pro 20 les high-ra
M10 95 10 11 50 50 50 35
115 10 11 50 50 50 55
120 10 11 50 50 50 60
80 12 13 65 50 50 20
100 12 13 65 60 60 30
M12
120 12 13 65 60 60 50
Tension
loadload Shear Thickness
Thickness of ofTighten
Tighten tor
ension Shear Boltload
load Bending
SizeBending
Tension
135 moment
moment
load Heff.Heff.
12 Shear Edge
load 13 Edge
Bending Distance
Distance
moment Distance
65Distance between
between
Heff. 60 Washer
Washer
Edge Distance
60 Distance between
65
foundation
torque
Washer
(Nm) (mm) C (mm) anchor S (mm) (Ø) foundation (Nm)
(kN) (kN) (kN)
(kN) (Nm)
(kN) (mm) (kN) C (mm)
(Nm) anchor S (mm) (Ø)
(mm) C (mm) (Nm) anchor S (mm)
(mm) (Ø)
105 16 18 85 70 70 (mm) 15
2.62.6 3.3 3.3
M6 140 5.52.65.5 16 40
403.3 18 6 05.56 0 85 01 2 080
1 240 12 x126 0x801.6
1.6 100 0
1 010240 5
125 x 1.6
4.14.1 6.3 6.3
M16 M8 134.113 50
506.3 7 5137 5 01 5 0
1 550 16 x167 5x 1.6
1.6 1 0105100 0 15
15x 1.6
16
180 26.526.5 16 18 85 41 7 480
5.85.8 8.5 8.5
M10 5.8 58
588.5 7 87
826.5 1 758 20 x208 7x802.0
2.0 1 210780
142 0 30
30x 2.0
20
9.29.2 12 12
M12 220 46.546.5
9.2 16 681268 18 21 0 2
1 046.5 85 42 0 480
2 068 24 x124
0 2x802.5
2.5 0144 0
1 420120 50
50x 2.5
24
14 14 23 23
M 1 6 118.5118.5
14 802380 2 01 2 0
1118.5 02 4 0
2 480 30 x130
2 0x 3.0
3.0 1 6204106 0 100
100x 3.0
30
H eff.= Effective anchorage depth

Installation ( pre-positioned installation )


I nsta lla tion
1 2 3

Tinst Tinst Tinst

1 -2Drill a hole and clean with a brush, remove dust with a blower. | Place the fixture and insert the through bolt with
a hammer. | 3 - Tighten to the recommended torque.

Usable
Usable Setting Setting Usable
PlugPlug
& drill Ø ØLength
& drill Length LengthPlug & depth
drill depth
Ø min.Length
Length min. Length
(mm)(mm) (mm)(mm) (mm)(mm)(mm) (mm)(mm) (mm) (mm)
6 6 50 50 5 5 6 30 30 50 5
6 6 65 65 10 10 6 40 40 65 10
6 6 80 80 25 25 6 40 40 80 25
6 6 95 95 40 40 6 40 40 95 40
8 8 50 50 5 5 8 27 27 50 5
8 8 60 60 10 10 8 30 30 60 10
8 8 80 80 10 10 8 50 50 80 10
8 8 85 85 15 15 8 50 50 85 15
8 8 95 95 25 25 8 50 50 95 25
8 8 1 1 51 1 5 45 45 8 50 5 01 1 5 45
10 10 60 60 5 5 10 33 33 60 5
10 10 70 70 10 10 10 35 35 70 10
10 10 95 95 15 15 10 58 58 95 15
10 1 1 01 1 0 30 58 261
10 30 10 58 110 30
10 10 1 2 51 2 5 45 45 10 58 58 125 45
SHIELD ANCHOR - SSA
Features:
• Assembly detachable, multiple removing and fixing.
• Low energy impact, power-saving assembly. SSA
• Force controlled expansion.
• Flexibility inside threaded anchor.
• Variable length and art of threaded rods or bolts.
•By tightening the screw, the cone pulls into the sleeve and tense
against the drill hole.
• Small edge distance and small distance between anchor.
• Expansion elements are held together by a spring.
• Optimum taper nut angle for maximum expansion.
• Pressed steel segment ensures consistent dimensional accuracy.
• Provide a projecting stud to support fixture during installation and
removal.
• Suitable for use in concrete, natural stone, brick and sand stone.

Typical Applications:
For fixing: steel constructions, handrails, consoles, brackets, ladders, gates and spacing designs.

Technical Data:
(Recommended loads concrete C 20/25 and in brick work). Usable Length
t Fixture
H eff.
Setting Depth

Distance to Edge Distance Between Min. Thickness of H eff.


Size C Anchors S Foundation hmin Cone

(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) Drill


Ø
M6 52.5 105 70 35
M8 60 120 80 40
M10 75 150 100 50 Drilling Depth
(Hole Depth)
M12 90 180 120 60 Bolt Length

Materials:
• Zinc plated and die-cast.

Setting Data:

Edge distance > 1,5 x H eff., distance between anchors > 3 x H eff. M H A Sleeve Anchor
Metal Products

Thickness of foundation > 2 x H eff. Fea tur es


• Sma ll edge a nd spa ce dista nces
• Torque controlled expansion
• Zinc plated > 5µm
• Through xing

Concrete Applications

Brick Work Torque


steel constructions, ma chines, pro les, under-constructions

Torque Brick
Size Tension Shear Tension Shear Concrete
Type Tension load Shear load Bending moment Tighten torque Distance between Distance to edge Min. thickness Spanner Spanner
(kN) (kN) (Nm) (Nm) anchor S (mm) C (mm) of found size (SAS) size (SAB)
(Order No)
(hmin) mm

KN KN KN N.m N.m
M6 2.0 2.5 4.20 8.0 105 55.0 90.0 10.0 10.0
M8 3.0 3.3 5.30 25.0 120 60.0 100.0 13.0 13.0
M10 5.0 5.5 12.80 40.0 150 75.0 120.0 17.0 15.0
M12 7 .5 8.0 25.0 50.0 225 115.0 140.0 --- 19.0

I nsta lla tion

M6 3.3 2.1 1.6 6.5 5.0 M H A -S Sleeve Anchor with hexagon screw
Tinst

Drill Ø mm Length Thread Drillingdepth Usablelength Settingdepth


mm mm mm min.

M8 4.8 4.4 2.1 15.0 7.5


mm
M6
M6
M8
M8
M10
M10

M10 6.2 6.1 2.6 27.0 13.0 M H A -B Sleeve Anchor with threaded bolt and nut
Plug & drill Ø
(mm)
Length
(mm)
Drilling
Depth
(mm)
Usable
Length
(mm)
Setting
Depth Min.
(mm)
8 45 55 5 35
8 60 55 15 35

M12 9.7 12.4 3.9 50.0 23.0


10 60 60 15 40
10 80 60 25 40
12 70 70 15 50
12 100 70 35 50

*for cracked concrete we shall use 0,5 x this value (approximately)


Drilling Usable Setting Drilling Usable Setting
Size Drill Ø Length depth length depth min. Size Drill Ø Length depth length depth min.
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
M6 8 40 55 5 35 M6 8 45 55 5 35
M6 8 65 55 25 35 M6 8 60 55 15 35
M8 10 50 60 5 40 M8 10 60 60 15 40
M8 10 75 60 30 40 M8 10 80 60 25 40
M8 10 95 60 50 40 M10 12 70 70 15 50
M10 12 75 70 15 50 M10 12 100 70 35 50
M10 12 100 70 40 50
M10 12 130 70 70 50
M12 16 65 90 5 75
M12 16 110 90 25 75
M12 16 145 90 60 75

58 Mungo Befestigungstechnik AG

kat_en-2007-11-29.indd 58 4.12.2007 10:13:36 Uhr

262
• Europea n Technica l Ap
• Torque controlled expa
• Applications in damp a
• Stainless steel A4/316
• Face xing or through

Installation Applications
Installation Parameters: fa ca des, ca ble tra ys, ra iling
under-constructions,
A- Using a hexagon screw: insert shield only, place the fixture over the hole and insert a hexagon screw with a washer high
through the fixture.
B- Using a threaded bolt and nut: insert the shield with a threaded bolt, position the fixture over the thread and add a
washer with a nut.
A- Shield Anchor with Hexagon Screw:
Min. Hole
Bolt Length Min.Drill Ø Shield Length Setting Depth Usable Length Spanner Size
Size Depth
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
H eff. (mm) (mm)
Bolt Size Tension
55 load Shear load Bending moment Heff. 10
Edge Distance Distance between Wash
M6 70 (kN) 12 (kN) 45 (Nm) 50 (mm)35 25
C (mm) 10 S (mm)
anchor (Ø)
85 40
M6 65 2.6 3.3 5.5 40 6100 120 12 x 1
M8M8 80 4.1 14 6.3 50 13 55 50 40 7255 131 5 0 16 x 1
M10 95 5.8 8.5 26.5 58 8407 174 20 x 2
M12 75 9.2 12 46.5 68 1 10
02 204 24 x 2
M10 M 1 6 90 14 16 23 60 118.5 65 80 50 1 25
20 172 4 0 30 x 3
115 50
90 10
M12 105 20 75 85 60 25 19
120 40

I nsta lla tion


1 2 3 4

Tinst

1 - Drill a hole and clean it with a brush, remove dust with a blower.| 2 - Place the plug and the object to fix.
2 3 - Tighten the screw. | 4 - Fixing completed.

B- Shield Anchor with Threaded Bolt and Nut:


Us
Threaded
Min. Drill Ø Shield Length
Min. Hole
Setting Depth
Plug & Spaner
Usable Length drill Ø Size Length Len
Size Length Depth (mm) (mm)
H eff. (m
(mm)
6 (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) 50
65 10 6 65 1
M6 80 12 45 50 35 25 6 10 80 2
115 60 6 95 4
75 10 8 50
90 25 8 13 60 1
M8 14 50 55 40
115 50
8 80 1
125 60
8 85 1
90 15 8 95 2
M10 105 16 60 65 50 30
135 60
8 17 115 4
10 60
110 15 10 70 1
M12 125 20 75 85 60 30
170 75
1 0 19 95 1
10 110 3
10 125 4
1 2 3 4 10 140 6
10 160 8
Throughbolt, stainless steel A4/316

Fea tur es
• Europea n Technica l Approva l O ption 7 for uncra cked concrete
• Torque controlled expansion

10 180 1
• Applications in damp areas and outdoors
• Stainless steel A4/316
• Face xing or through xing

Applications

12 80
fa ca des, ca ble tra ys, ra ilings, steel constructions, ma chines,
under-constructions, high-racks, pro les

Bolt Size

M6
M8
M10
Tension load
(kN)

2.6
4.1
5.8
Shear load
(kN)

3.3
6.3
8.5
Bending moment
(Nm)

5.5
13
26.5
Heff.
(mm)

40
50
58
Edge Distance
C (mm)

60
75
87
Distance between
anchor S (mm)
120
150
174
Washer
(Ø)

12 x 1.6
16 x 1.6
20 x 2.0
12
Thickness of
foundation
(mm)
100
100
120
Tighten torque
(Nm)

5
15
30
Spanner
size
10
13
17
110 1
12 125 3
M12 9.2 12 46.5 68 102 204 24 x 2.5 140 50 19
M16 14 23 118.5 80 120 240 30 x 3.0 160 100 24

I nsta lla tion

2
Tinst

12 145 5
Plug & drill Ø

6
6
6
Length

50
65
80
Usable
Length

5
10
25
12
Setting
depth min.

1 - Drill a hole and clean it with a brush, remove dust with a blower.| 2 - Place the plug and the object to fix.
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
30
40
40
165 7
12 185 9
6 95 40 40
8 50 5 27
8 60 10 30
8 80 10 50
8 85 15 50
8 95 25 50

3 - Tighten the screw. | 4 - Fixing completed.


8 115 45 50
10 60 5 33
10 70 10 35

16 115 1
10 95 15 58
10 110 30 58
10 125 45 58
10 140 60 58
10 160 80 58
10 180 100 58
12 80 5 49
12 110 15 68

16 130 1
12 125 30 68
12 145 50 68
12 165 70 68
12 185 90 68
16 115 10 70
16 130 15 80
16 145 30 80
16 160 45 80
16 180 65 80

16 145 3
20 160 30 100

1 6 263 160 4
16 180 6
20 160 3
50 Mungo Befestigungstechnik AG

kat_en-2007-11-29.indd 50 4.12.2007 10:12:24 Uhr


RESIN CAPSULE, EPOXY-ACRYLATE - (CEA)
Features:
• European Technical Approval Option 8 for uncracked concrete
• Small edge and space distances
• Temperature range short term: -40°C - +80°C
• Temperature range long term: -40°C - +50°C
• Anchor rod with 45° end

Typical Applications:
Steel constructions, Cable Trays, guard rails, under-constructions and machines

Materials:
• Stainless
• Hot-Dip Galvanized.

Technical Data:
Recommended loads (concrete C 20/25).
Distance Min. dis- Min. thick-
Ten- Bending Edge Min. edge
Shear Bending betw. tance betw. ness of Tighten
sion moment distance distance
load moment anchors anchors found. torque Spanner
load A4-70 (c) (cmin)
(s) (smin) (hmin) size

(kN) (kN) (Nm) (Nm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (Nm)

M8 8 5 10.8 11.9 240 120 40 40 110 10 10


M10 12 8 21.1 23.8 180 90 45 45 120 20 17
M12 16 12 37.1 42.1 220 110 55 55 140 40 19
M14 18 16 51.8 58.1 240 120 60 60 150 50 22
M16 20 22 94.9 106.7 250 125 65 65 160 80 24
M20/135 30 35 185.7 207.9 280 140 85 85 220 120 30
M20/175 30 35 185.7 207.9 340 170 70 70 180 120 30
M24 38 50 320.6 359.4 420 210 105 105 260 180 36
M30 60 60 642 402 700 350 280 140 330 200 46
CEAL M8 7.2 44 10.8 11.9 - - 80 100 140 10 10
CEAL M10 11.6 6.8 21.1 23.8 - - 90 110 140 20 17
CEAL M12 16.8 10 37.1 42.1 - - 110 135 150 40 19
CEAL M16 31.2 18.8 94.9 106.7 - - 125 155 160 80 24
CEAL M20 48.8 29.2 185.7 207.9 - - 170 210 300 120 30
CEAL M24 70.4 42 320.0 359.4 - 210 260 400 180 36

Safety factor 2.5 / 1 kN 100 kg

Temperatures:

-5° to 5°C 5° to 20°C


20° to 30°C 30°C and more
Temperature
(min.) (min.)
(min.) (min.)

Hardening times 300 60 20 10

264
Resin Capsule, Epoxy-Acrylate (CEA)

Ø Length Drilling Hole Ø Drilling Depth

(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)


8 80 10 80
10 80 12 90
12 95 14 110
14 95 16 120
16 95 18 125
20 135 24 140
20 175 25 170
24 210 38 210
30 265 35 280

Resin Capsule, Epoxy-Acrylate (CEA) (setting depth 1.5x)

Drilling
Ø Length Drilling Depth Fit to Anchor
Hole Ø
Rod
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
9 115 10 120 M8x150
11 115 12 135 M10x175
13 125 14 165 M12x215
17 125 18 190 M16x255
22 245 25 255 M20x345
24 275 28 315 M24x405

Setting Tool for rods without drive

For M8, M10, M12, M14, M16, M20, M24, M30

265
RESIN CAPSULE, EPOXY-ACRYLATE - (CEA)
Anchor Rod

Thread Length Usable Length


Thread
(mm) (mm)
M8 110 15
M8 150 55
M10 130 20
M10 170 65
M12 160 30
M12 220 90
M12 260 130
M12 300 170
M14 170 40
M16 190 40
M16 230 80
M16 260 110
M16Throughbolt,
300 Throughbolt,
150 steel stainless
stainless A4/316 steel A4/316
M20 230 40
M20 260 70 Fea tur es Fea tur es
M24 300 65 • Europea n Technica l A•pprEouvraolpOeapn
tioTnec7hn
foicraulnAcrpapcrkoevda lcO
onp
• Torque controlled expansion
• Torque controlled expansion
M30 380 70
• Applications in damp• areas
Applications
and outdoors in damp areas and
• Stainless steel A4/316• Stainless steel A4/316
Anchor Sleeve with internal thread xing xing or through xing
• Face xing or through• Face

Drilling Applications Applications


Ø Drilling Min. Screw fagcsa, d
Thread Hole fa ca des, ca ble tra ys, ra ilin steese,lccaobnlsetrturactyios,nrsa, im
linagcsh,in
steese, l co
Depth in
Ø under-constructions, high-racks,under-constructions,
pro les high-racks, p
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
M8 12 15 90 12
M10 16 18 90 15
M12 16 22 90 18
M16 Bolt Size 20Tension load 28 Shear Size 125
Bolt load Tension
Bendingload 24 ShearHeff.
moment load Bending
Edgemoment
Distance Heff. between Edge Distance
Distance Washer Thickness
Distance betweenof Washer torque Thi
Tighten
foundation
anchor
fo
(kN) (kN) (kN)(Nm) (kN)
(mm) (Nm)
C (mm) anchor
(mm) S (mm) C (mm)
(Ø) S (mm) (Ø)(Nm)
M20 24 35 180 40 (mm)
M6 2.6 M6
3.3 2.65.5 3.340 5.56 0 401 2 0 6 0x 1.6
12 1 2100 0 12 x 1.6
5
M8 4.1 M8
6.3 4.113 6.350 137 5 501 5 0 7 5x 1.6
16 1 5100 0 16 x 1.6
15
M10 5.8 M 10
8.5 5.826.5 8.558 26.58 7 581 7 4 8 7x 2.0
20 1 7142 0 20 x 2.0
30
Materials: M12 9.2 M
121 2 9.246.5
14
1268
2380
46.5
102
118.5
682 0 4
802 4 0
124
0 2x 2.5 2 0144 0 24 x 2.5
50
30 x 3.0
M16 14 M
231 6 118.5 120 130
2 0x 3.0 2 4106 0 100

• Zinc Plated Steel


• Hot-Dip Galvanized.
I nsta lla tion I nsta lla tion
1 2 3 5

Tinst Tinst

1 -2Drill a hole of requested2diameter and depth.


2 - Remove dust with a blower and clean the hole with a brush.
3 - Tap with a hammer or a setting tool until fixing depth is reached. Usable Usable S
Plug & drill Ø Length Plug & drill ØSetting
Length Length de
5 - Tighten to the recommended torque. (mm) (mm)
Length
(mm)(mm)
depth min.
(mm)(mm) (mm)
6 50 5 6 30 50 5
6 65 10 6 40 65 10
6 80 25 6 40 80 25
6 95 40 6 40 95 40
8 50 5 8 27 50 5
8 60 10 8 30 60 10
8 80 10 8 50 80 10
266 8 85 15 8 50 85 15
8 95 25 8 50 95 25
8 115 45 8 5 01 1 5 45
267
FIRESTOP
SYSTEMS
S P
S F
SFSP
BETA CONTECH PRODUCT SELECTOR
• FIRESTOP SEALANTS
STI FIRESTOP • COMPOSITE SHEET
• FIRESTOP MORTAR
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION • FIRESTOP PUTTY
• FIRESTOP PILLOWS
• BASIC USE
• PATHWAYS
• COMPOSITION & MATERIALS
• PUTTY PADS
• FIRE PROTECTIVE CABLE COATING

Specialized

Construction
Technologies

www.betacontech.com www.stifirestop.com

270
BETA CONTECH
Beta Contech is specialized in advanced architectural and industrial products, ranging from raised access to
flooring systems, architectural expansion joint systems, architectural impact protection systems, firestopping
systems and others. The company operates within the GCC and MENA countries and has a wide reputation
among contractors.

STI FIRESTOP
Specified Technologies is an industry leader solely committed to the development of innovative, reliable
firestopping solutions that help stop the spread of fire smoke and toxic fumes .
Beta Contech’s innovative firestop solutions are for all types of new construction and retrofit applications.

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Basic Usage
These products are used solely or in combination to construct firestop systems effective in sealing through-penetrations,
construction joints and high traffic openings against the spread of fire, smoke or hot gasses. A wide range of tested
systems is available for standard constructions and penetrants with ratings up to 4 hours.
These products and systems are suitable for sealing electrical, plumbing, mechanical or data/communications
penetrations, including:

Pipes, Conduits or Ducts


• Metallic
• Nonmetallic
• Insulated

Cables
• Telephone
• Power
• Data and Control

Cable Trays and Bus Ducts


• Steel
• Aluminum and Copper
Construction Joints

Composition & Materials


STI Firestop products are a
unique combination of passive
and intumescent (expands when
heated) materials. Products utilizing
this expansion mechanism exhibit
unusually fast and aggressive,
highly directionalized expansion.

271
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Firestop Sealants

Triple S®Intumescent Sealant


Premium grade, water-based firestop caulk featuring STI’s patented two-stage intumescent
technology. The perfect choice for the broadest array of combustible and non-combustible
electrical penetrants requiring a permanent, durable seal.

Firestop Sealants

LCI Intumescent Sealant


Standard grade, water-based firestop caulk engineered to address most common
combustible and noncombustible electrical applications typically found in light commercial
construction.

Pathways

EZ-Path® Fire Rated Pathway


A mechanical cable pathway system utilizing a self-contained, self-sealing firestop system.
Easy moves, adds and changes with no firestopping required ever. Three sizes and a full
range of accessories adapt this system to virtually any application.

Putty Pads

SSP Putty Pads


When used with both metallic and non-metallic switch and receptacle boxes, pads are UL
Tested and Classified to permit larger boxes and reduced spacing.

272
Composite Sheet

Intumescent Composite Sheet


Lightweight, easily fabricated panel surface mounts to walls and floors to provide a neat,
clean seal for medium to large openings typically used for Cable Trays, bus ducts, and
conduit banks.

Fire Protective Cable Coating

CS Cable Spray
Water-based spray applied coating used to provide short term circuit integrity and
improved flame spread characteristics for grouped electrical cables.

Firestop Mortar

SSM Firestop Mortar


A strong, lightweight and cementitious mortar designed for large openings typically used
for Cable Trays or banks of conduits.

Firestop Putty

SSP Intumescent Putty


Non-hardening intumescent putty which is easily installed and removed making it the
perfect choice for cable penetrations requiring occasional retrofitting.

Firestop Pillows

SSB Intumescent Firestop Pillows


Compressible cushions are easily installed and removed. The perfect firestop solution for
medium to large openings including cable bundles, Cable Trays, bus ducts and multiple
conduits.

273
LOCATIONS
OUTLETS

Sales Operations
Jeddah / KSA Najran / KSA Qassim / Buraidah / KSA
Tel : +966 12 627 8222 Tel : +966 17 546 3874 Tel : +966 16 382 3946
Fax: +966 12 627 8722 Fax: +966 17 546 3874 Fax: +966 16 385 2186
unitech.ksa@ikkgroup.com unitech.ksa@ikkgroup.com unitech.ksa@ikkgroup.com

Jeddah - Ghurab Showroom / KSA Sharorah / KSA Qassim Showroom / KSA


Tel : +966 12 667 2000 Tel : +966 17 532 8153 Tel : +966 16 385 2598
Fax: +966 12 661 4306 Fax: +966 17 532 8153 Fax: +966 16 385 4262
unitech.ksa@ikkgroup.com unitech.ksa@ikkgroup.com unitech.ksa@ikkgroup.com

Mak kah, Taif / KSA Gizan / KSA Hail / KSA


Tel : +966 12 541 1206 Tel : +966 17 321 6660 Tel : +966 16 543 3931
Fax: +966 12 532 1675 Fax: +966 17 321 0665 Fax: +966 16 543 3935
unitech.ksa@ikkgroup.com unitech.ksa@ikkgroup.com unitech.ksa@ikkgroup.com

Mad inah / KSA Al Qunfudah / KSA Skakah / Qurayyat / KSA


Tel : +966 14 864 9111 Tel : +966 17 350 0266 Tel : +966 14 626 3904
Fax: +966 14 864 9222 Fax: +966 17 350 0266 Fax: +966 14 626 3905
unitech.ksa@ikkgroup.com unitech.ksa@ikkgroup.com unitech.ksa@ikkgroup.com

Mad inah Showroom - UPF / KSA Riyadh North / KSA Tabuk / KSA
Tel : +966 14 834 6244 Tel : +966 11 454 9282 Tel : +966 14 423 5203
Fax: +966 14 834 5082 Fax: +966 11 456 6627 Fax: +966 14 423 5203
unitech.ksa@ikkgroup.com unitech.ksa@ikkgroup.com unitech.ksa@ikkgroup.com

Yanbu / KSA Riyadh South / KSA Hafr el Batin / KSA


Tel : +966 14 390 1499 Tel : +966 11 448 0112 Tel : +966 13 729 3644
Fax: +966 14 322 7101 Fax: +966 11 447 7421 Fax: +966 13 729 3644
unitech.ksa@ikkgroup.com unitech.ksa@ikkgroup.com unitech.ksa@ikkgroup.com

Khamis Mushayt / KSA Riyadh - West / KSA Dammam / KSA


Tel : +966 17 237 5929 Tel : +966 11 431 6271 Tel : +966 13 859 0097
Fax: +966 17 237 8783 : +966 11 431 7642 Fax: +966 13 857 8177
unitech.ksa@ikkgroup.com unitech.ksa@ikkgroup.com unitech.ksa@ikkgroup.com

Design, Logistics, Materials, Media & R&D


GERMANY UAE CHINA
Stuttgart TOSL Jebel Ali Yiwu - Zhejiang Province
Tel : +49 711 6868 7222 Tel : +971 4 886 0262 Tel : +86 579 8545 3180
Fax: +49 711 6868 7223 Fax: +971 4 886 0261 Fax: +86 579 8542 7682
unitech.germany@ikkgroup.com tosl.jxb@ikkgroup.com unitech.china@ikkgroup.com

276
Dammam / Showroom / KSA Al Ain / UAE Cairo - Gamhouriyah St. / Egypt
Tel : +966 13 834 9632 Tel : +971 3 761 9050 Tel: +20 2 2787 2152
Fax: +966 13 834 9457 Fax: +971 3 761 9051 Fax: +20 2 2593 1053
unitech.ksa@ikkgroup.com unitech.alain@ikkgroup.com unitech.egypt@ikkgroup.com

Jubail / KSA Doha / Qatar Tripoli / Libya


Tel : +966 13 361 4390 Tel : +974 4451 3301/2/3 Tel: +218 21 717 0264
Fax: +966 13 362 4499 Fax: +974 4451 3305 Fax: +218 21 477 1612
unitech.ksa@ikkgroup.com unitech.qatar@ikkgroup.com unitech.libya@ikkgroup.com

Khafji / KSA Beirut / Lebanon Kuwait City / Kuwait


Tel : +966 53 444 5135 Tel : +961 1 858 277 Tel : +965 2 4924 937
unitech.ksa@ikkgroup.com Fax: +961 1 858 276 Fax: +965 2 4924 938
unitech.lebanon@ikkgroup.com unitech.kuwait@ikkgroup.com

Hufuf / KSA Tripoli Showroom / Lebanon


Tel : +966 13 530 1474 Tel : +961 6 443 909
Fax: +966 13 530 7144 Fax: +961 6 443 909
unitech.ksa@ikkgroup.com unitech.lebanon@ikkgroup.com

Manama / Bahrain Amman / Jordan


Tel : +973 1 787 4897 Tel : +962 6 556 3030
Fax: +973 1 778 9470 Fax: +962 6 554 7911
unitech.bahrain@ikkgroup.com unitech.jordan@ikkgroup.com

Dubai - Al Rashidiyah / UAE Muscat / Oman


Tel : +9714 2591 773 Tel : +968 24 591 006
Fax : +9714 2591 774 Fax : +968 24 597 006
unitech.dubai@ikkgroup.com unitech.oman@ikkgroup.com

Abu Dhabi - Musaffah / UAE Cairo - Maadi / Egypt


Tel : +971 2 551 2334 Tel : +20 2 2525 4271/3
Fax: +971 2 551 2335 Fax: +20 2 2525 4274
unitech.auh@ikkgroup.com unitech.egypt@ikkgroup.com

KSA LEBANON
Tosl Jeddah Multi-D Beirut
Tel : +966 2 627 8275 Tel : +961 1 841 155
Fax: +966 2 627 8727 Fax: +961 1 841 156
cpu.jeddah@ikkgroup.com unitech@ikkgroup.com

277
Managing Office

Main Branch

Branch

Factory

Design Office
Purchasing & Supply

278
Locations
Kingdom of Saudi Arabia,
United Arab Emirates,
Qatar, Bahrain, Jordan,
Egypt, Lebanon, Germany,
China, Oman and Kuwait

279